Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
Home
My WebLink
About
184 Twin Coach Ct
T I CITY OF SANFORD X '' '' ' ' ' MAR 1r0.2016_ BUILDING-& FIRE PREVENTION D PERMIT APPLICATION n_ rl - ,;' BY: 4 Application NO: ( - -1 -j Lt Documented Construction Value: $ It' r II -- r- y , . Job Address: r7 Q .. r. f•,,, :''• r , r . - , r n'' +' A Historic District: Yes [].No P © a cel ID: O 75© OCR 0 NCO bC()Cr Resideniial Commercial Type'of Work: thew rr A:dditinn'19' Alteration 0 s Re air 4 •.[], p 'Demo 0 • Change of.U`se E {1Vlove Description of Work: V/ /y1i ''' tyf Ir a+ ,•a r a + ,tr .. .,. - .t! ,r F + f •1, t- L77 e il 9 r 1.[„J fir i , id(•. p Plan Review'Contact-Person: Title.-i Phone: Fax: rj Ema1 : Ir Property Owner Information ,, f Name Phone: Q (—)-- nStreet: rgpCityStateZip: -ti;, " 4 .I t.!ti,Y%I, l ='•L 6..'. r r^•••"- A J ' , Y.,` ;I, f --''!ir.33>tV'ti•;;'.7:.`,';, f^ . Contractor Information , " ^' • :,, 'Y Name ' I % ' i / lnC: Phone: Street: I/ 5 City, State Zip: 5 3ar10 Fa` State License No.: It Aichitect/ En `ineer Information i Name: Street: , I :; - City, St; in: Phone: f Fax: E- mail: tl Bonding Company: f r, Address: t• . Lender: , :, 1 1 . „ I., -o ' r, Address: WARNING TO OWNER: YOUR FAILURE TO RECORD A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MAY RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICEFORIMPROVEMENTSTOYOURPROPERTY. - A NOTICE'OF COMMENCEMENT NVIUST BE RECORDED ANDPOSTEDONTHEJOBSITEBEFORETHETIRST. INSPECTION. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING; CONSULTWITHYOURLENDERORAN' ATTORNEY BEFORE RECORDING YOUR NOTICE• OF COMMENCEMENT. A' '", h Application isherebymade'to 'obtain a permit to do the work and' installations as indicated." I certify that no woik or installtion has commenced prior totheissuanceofapermitandthatallworkwillbeperformedtomeetstandardsofalllawsregulatingconstructioninthisjurisdiction. `I undeistand"that a separate permit must be secured for electrical work, plumbing; signs; wells, pools, furnaces, boilers, beaters, tanks, and air conditioners, etc. FBC 105.3 Shall bfd inscribed'with•the date of applicationn aud the•code ineffect as of that date: 5"Edition (2014) Florida Buildink Code Revised: June 30, 2015 ' : ) Permit Application f • L. • r 1 0 1'1, •:j '`- I'`, that may be NOTICE: -In addition to the, requirements of this permit, there may be additional restrictions applicable to this property Y found in the public records of this county, and there may be additional permits`required from other governmental entities such as waterI ?" management districts, state agencies, or federal agencies. Acceptance of permit is verification that I will notify, the owner of the property of the requirements of Florida Lien Law, FS 713. The City of Sanford requires payment of a plan review fee at the time of permit submittal. A copy of the executed contract is requiredinorder -to calculate a plan review charge and will be'coiisider'ed the estimafed construction value of the job at the time of submittal. The actual construction value will be figured based on the current ICC Valuation Table in effect at the time the permit is issued, in accordance with -local drdinance. Should calculated charges figured.off the executed contract exceed the actual construction'vaiue, credit will be applied to your permit fees when the permit is issued. - t ' l m OWNER'S AFFIDAVIT: I certify,that,all of the foregoing'information,is'accurateand that all work will be done in compliance with all applicable laws regulating construction and zoning._ r t ? G; r_• } t , Date Signature of Contractor/Agent, f' " it Date 1 Signature er/Agent _ pO ' 1! t1 t t wt cr/Agen Name L _ Pnnt Contractor/Agent's Name Date - State-State of Florida Date Si store of Notary -State of Florida S1 re o J HALL " _ 1AMY e, r r = MY CAMMISSION i EE 217094' - MYCOMMISSION i EE 217094 — '' EXPIRES: August 11, 2018 3•: ' { 2016 7eEX ?REA-1 Owner/Ag ersona y Kno to a or Contractor gen yis ersona y- own to Me or Produced -ID - - ^. y - Produced ID - Type , W \ IS •Zi: 111 rl BELOW-IS.FOR OFFICE USE ONLY Permits Required: Building _ Electrical Mechanical Plumbing[]_ —Gas . _Roof.O Occupancy -Use: _ _ _Flood Zone:.- X. Construction Type• _ 5cE A Tot.t}EP of Stories: Total Sq Ft of Bldg: - -` - Min. Occupancy Load: - New Construction: Electric - #-of,AmOs, .us 1-if , Plumbing - # of Fixtures Fire Sprinkler Permit: Yes No [] # of Heads _ Fire Alarm Permit: -Yes No - 10W ' UTILITIES: • s ,WASTE WATER:. - APPROVALS:ZONING: y„ 1. ,. r.t :,r. ! + ;t 'IS `! 1 r f, i' f,r 'i tt'^r I;t ., t•i}i fI(' r " I r lC, 3, ( , t' I st t BUILDING: • •'- s' itENGINEERING: s V''1 •11 FIRE: _., it 0 di U COMMENTS: r ! ' i 1 1 1, , w , , , • +. + / 1 O tt ! .n • its r• 1' tr Permit Application ' Revised: June 30, 2015 s4 City of Sanford Planning and Development Services Engineering - Floodplain Management Flood Zone Determination Request Form Name: P-\v" -e, COL-Lwu . Firm:C- Address: 'S00 GAQL2 S A G E Co-ve ton City: State: F- l_ Zip Code: Phone: 3i -4Z-1 Co3$5 Fax: $00-g66-1$S'I Email: OFFtCf- ® CocuOS6OLV%CE coal Property Address: 4 (w I, J Ca AC+ CO o e- t Property Owner: _C A(Z2-k ACHE CAQ F- L S v fi 4e)W es Parcel identification Number: 12 - ZO ^ 30 - 300 -o 130 -600O Phone Number: 401 - 323-$l(,0 Email: The reason for the flood plain determination is: X New structure Existing Structure (pre-2007 FIRM adoption) Expansion/ Addition Existing Structure (post 2007 FIRM adoption) Pre 2007 FIRM adoption = finished floor elevation 12" above BFE Post 2007 FIRM adoption = finished floor elevation 24" above BFE (Ordinance 4076) OFFICIAL USE ONLY Flood Zone: Base Flood Elevation: tit A Datum: /A FIRM Panel Number: I ZOZ94 60-10 F Map Date: ScPz• -Le), WO-7 The referenced Flood Insurance Rate Map indicates the following: The parcel is in the: floodplain floodway A portion of the parcel is in the: floodplain floodway The parcel is not in the: O floodplain floodway The structure is in the: floodplain floodway The structure is not in the: floodplain floodway If the subject property is determined to be flood zone 'A', the best available information used to determine the base flood elevation is: Reviewed by: !mil t y_c C A'S v C t= V"\ Date: 3 - k,4 - 701(0 Iv THIS IN TRUMENT PREPAR B Name: Address: NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT State of Florida County of Seminole Permit Number: I liilll Itllt lull lifll Iliff full IIII IIII NARYANNE NORSE, SENTNOLE COUNT-Y C:E.E:RK OF CIRWIl COURT & COMPTROLLERBF, 8647 Pq 723 (1P3s) CLERK'S 4 2016025372 RE(;ORDED 0.3/10/2016 10: ;25:,3-; AN REC'ORDING FEES 4•1I .0n RECORDED BY ,iec_kenro Parcel ID Number: 1 y !J vy --3 L 0 0 00 The undersigned hereby gives notice that improvement will be made to certain real property, and in accordance with Chapter 713, Florida Statutes, the following information is provided in this Notice of Commencement. DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY: (Legal description of the property and street address if available) Cnac cry -r+ 'Sa= YA .Gl --Z,a'1, RAL DI, SCRIPTIONOF IMPROVEMENT: n.. V"% r,1-^ O i' 1.- / r OWNEI, INFORMATION: Name: I rr t Cl C'r Address: ' JW trQ C j i CE Fee Simple Title Holder (if other than Address. Persons within the State of Florida Designated by Owner upon whom notice or other documents may be served as provided by Section 713.13(1)(b), Florida Statutes. Name: In addition to himself, Owner Designates Section 713.13(1)(b), Florida Statutes. of To receive a copy of the Lienor's Notice as Provided in Expiration Date of Notice of Co(The expiration date Is 1 year from date of recording unless a different date Is specified) WARNING TO OWNER: ANY PAYMENTS MADE BY THE OWNER AFTER THE EXPIRATION OF THE NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT ARE CONSIDERED IMPROPER PAYMENTS UNDER CHAPTER 713, PART I, SECTION 713.13, FLORIDA STATUTES, AND CAN RESULT IN YOUR PAYING TWICE FOR IMPROVEMENTS TO YOUR PROPERTY A NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT MUST BE RECORDED AND POSTED ON THE JOB SITE BEFORE THE FIRST INSPECTION. IF YOU INTEND TO OBTAIN FINANCING, CONSULT WITH YOUR LENDER OR AN ATTORNEY BEFORE COMMENCING WORK OR RECORDING YOUR NOTICE OF COMMENCEMENT. Under penalties of perjuryAdeclare that I have read the foregoing and that the facts stated In It are true to the best of wl d and b l ( I % t JUSeI I In Owners Signature Owners Printed Name lo( ida Statute 713 13(1)(g)-' The owner must sign the notice of commencement and no one else may be permitted to sign in his or her stead' CO T— O CV 40 Q tea+ •, Oy IrR'yQ S u 2 W Cr 0 State of -71 ar1 at County of Cl _ z ` The foregoing Instrument was ac owledged before me this n day of 'Marc y1 , 2 . ¢ O — ( t- by V T i\, 1Kr , ` J 1 l Who is personally known to me t Name or person making to ent 0 -- ORwhohasproducedidentificationtypeofidentificationproduced: C G JO 'Z lQ L2 0 O FCr Wy AMY HALL hI,ty COMMISSION t EE 217094 EXPIRES: August 11, 2018 Notary Signature Bond-1 Thn, i4;ItM Fubl m LIMITED POWER OF ATTORNEY Altamonte Springs, Casselberry, Lake Mary, Longwood, Sanford, Seminole County, Winter Springs Date: a— C) — l I hereby naj an agent of. to be my lawful attorney -in -fact to act for me to apply for, receipt for, sign for and do all things necessary to this appointment for (check only one option): The specific permit and application for work located at: I TH 71L, rn n-ac-h . r-+- ar,d rd rr Street Address) Expiration Date for This Limited Power of Attorney: License Holder Name:0-Y'y) .r [f- s e . a-) ul n S State License Number:= H — / O 02'D / q Signature of License Holder: (v STATE OF FL^OXDA COUNTY OF V The foregoing instrument wa acknowledged before me this day of -Fe 6 . , 200 by t'S 0n ( who is efersonally known to me or who has produced identification and who did ( did4gpna n oath. Notary Seal) AMY HALL MY CNIVIISSION i EE 217094 EXPIRES: August 11, 2016B"*d rnn, Nobry Pubk undwohrs Rev. 08.12) A10 -1 Print QLVpe name Notary Public - State of ' d 0, Commission No. IEC -10G My Commission Expires: as REQUIRED INSPECTION SEQUENCE BP# 16-777 Address: 184 Twin Coach Court BUILDING PERMIT Min Max Inspection Description Footer / Setback Stemwall Slab / Mono Slab Lintel / Tie Beam / Fill / Down Cell Sheathing — Walls Sheathing — Roof Roof Dry In Frame Insulation Rough Firewall Screw Pattern Drywall / Sheetrock Lath Inspection Building Ceiling Air Barrier Insulation Roof (Com' l) Building Ceiling Grid Final Roof Final Stucco / Siding Final Insulation Final Firewall Final Door Final Window Final Utility Building F 1000 Mobile Home Tie Down 4 000 Mobile Home Building Final Pre -Demo Final Demo Final Single Family Residence Final Commercial — New Final Commercial — Addition / Alteration Final Commercial — Change of Use Final Building (Other) ELECTRICAL PERMIT Min Max Inspection Description Electric Underground Footer / Slab Steel Bond Electric Ceiling Rough Electric Wall Rough Electric Rough Pre -Power Final Temporary Pole j1000 Mobile Home Electric Final y :°=, Min Max Inspection Description Roof Storm Drain Rough Plumbing Underground Plumbing 2nd Rough Plumbing Tubset Plumbing Sewer Plumbing Grease Trap Rough Plumbing Steam / Chill Water Rough 11000 Mobile Home Plumbing Final MECHANICAL PERMIT Min Max Inspection Description Mechanical Rough Mechanical Fire Damper Framing Mechanical Ceiling Rough Mechanical Fire Damper Annular Space Mechanical Insulation Wrap Mechanical Fire Damper Angle Light / Water Test Ck Welds Mechanical Grease Duct Wrap 1000 Mobile Home Mechanical Final REVISED: June 2014 RECORD COPY Bp Ilc' 11-7 . APPROVED PLAivS mot- --- - ENr;. D PT. 3lia(le - f5 Ok -0 se%_ Irntirilm um lmdoll-p- kome-- LUA4.1 sal cks a11 r EVIEWED FOF CODE COMPLI NCE - - 1 PLARS EXAMINER t - N---- - i DATE 00, AN ORD BULL ING DNISION - - A PERMIl 136UED SHALL E CONSTRUETOD BE A ' -- LICENSE T PROCEED WIT THE WORK AND NOT AS AUTHQ TY TO VIOLATE, ANCEL, ALTER OR SET - - ASIDE•AN OF THE PROVIS NS OF THE TECHNICAL P e I CODES, N R SHALL ISSUA THE 8 JILDING OFFICIAL FROM THEREAFTER REOUIRI G A CORRECTION OF, ERRORS IN PLANS, CONST UCTION_OR.VIOLATIONS-OF.THIS CODE D bQc I_._- - _ - - -- ----- - - -- GLC COLL cC.,e n.-F • Qc i F j \4,D-)Dm M-L 1 Note: r_ ....._._ Not to Scalp. i OO7AST07r- BEDtYOOMJNo2IOTCENL+JsayROOM 1y.2• COVERED 41 PORCH GGG DINING AREA bIvISIONS T 111 12 341 34 55'- 53 57! 591 B p r _ _ '_ ea g pn 115 12a 131 33 35 520 stt tY VAMBel yj RhFING t43 531 Pe tember BOX ES 79 i R015 DBSCR1P710N Pelican Bay-1 L83i 63 t' MAX— 50' 1 Y 16'-1Q" t3'-10' 770, 1 _ 770i T i Pier Point Layout kwR.M'40 UrJ/deii V{W wnn,eafMhMwK7 M x y..__H p Gi w, W.err,w n+.r r. +wry wrar. d. LwMllNltlr WwYF.e 1 p7 Wti4. 9 .s.w aw+F.Lee aDom .OY.- y - I' MAX. - -I' MAX BrI- J 8' Porch WE MLAWN ft Z OATEn. t 7111 50' 0" I t 2714-B`- I <E Mobile Home Permit Worksheet Installer : Char I eS — / Q.Q5 / 9 / Address of homef--t— being installed Manufacturer J T\A I I rl Length x width NOTE: if home /s a single wide flit out one half of the blocking planIfhomeisatripleorquadwidesketchInremainderofhome I understand Lateral Arm Systems cannot be used on any home (new or used) where the sidewall ties exceed 5 ft 4 in. Installer's initials G Typical pier spacing 2' _7* I lateral Permit Number: Date: c) New Home Used Home Home installed to the Manufacturer's Installation Manual Home is installed in accord ce with Rule 15-C Single wide Wind Zone II ind Zone III Double wide Installation Decal # Triple/Quad Serial # PIER SPACING TABLE FOR USED HOMES Load bearing capacity Footer size sq in) 16" x 16" 256) 18 1/2" x 18 1/2" (342) 20" x 20" 400) 22" x 22" 484)" 24" X 24" 576)- 26" x 26" 676) 1000 s s s s 3000 s s Interpolated from Rule 15C 1' pler spacing table. PIER PAD SIZES I-beam pier pad size Perimeter pier pad size % b '%-1 Other pier pad sizes required by the mfg.) Draw the approximate locations of marriage wall openings 4 foot or greater. Use thisisymboltoshowthepiers. List all marriage wall openings greater than 4 foot below. and their pier pad sizes ow. Opening Pier pad size TIEDOWN COMPONENTS Longitudinal Stabilizin Device (LSD) Manufacturer StabsLongitudinalStabO1f z__ing evice w/Lateral Arms Manufacturer_© I ANCHORS 4ft 5ft FRAME TIES within 2' of end of home spaced at 5' 4" oc OTHER TIES Numbr Sidewall Longitudinal Marriage wall Shearwall_ Department of Growth Management Page 1 0BuildingDivisiong 27 MH Permit Worksheet Revised November 04, 2010 Mobile Home Permit Worksheet The pocket penetrometer tests are rounded down to 11),5b psforcheckheretodeclare1000lb. soil without sting. X X POCKET PENETROMETER TESTING METHOD 1. Test the perimeter of the home at 6 locations. 2. Take the reading at the depth of the footer. 3. Using 500 lb. increments, take the lowest reading and round down to that increment. X X X The results of the torque probe test is inch pounds or checkhereifyouaredeclaring5' anchors without testing . A test showing 275 Inch pounds or less will require 5 foot anchors. - Note: A state approved lateral arm system is being used and 4 ft. anchors are allowed at the sidewall locations. I understand 5 ft anchors are required at all centerline tie points where the torque test reading is 275 or less and where the mobile home manufacturer may requires anchors with 40001b holding capacity. G Installer's initials ALL TESTS MUST BE PERFORMED BY A LICENSED INSTALLER Installer Name , Date Tested _ 6- 16 Electrical Connect electrical conductors between multi -wide units, but not to the main power widsource. This includes the bonding wire between mult-e units. Pg. Plumbin Connect all sewer drains to an existing sewer tap or septic tank. Pg. Permit Number: Date: l Site Preparation Debris and organic material removed Water drainage: Natural Swale Pad Other Fasteningmulti wide units Floor. Type Fastener: Length: Spacing: Walls: Type Fastener: Length: Spacing: Roof: , Type Fastener: / : Le Spacing: For used homes a min 30 gauge, 8' e, galvanized metal stripwillbecenteredr"fhe peak of the roof and fastened with galv. roofing nail 2" on center on both sides of the centerline. Gasket (weatherpmolling regWmment I understand a properly installed homes and that condensation, rr a result of a poorly installed own of tape will not serve as a oaskel tet is a requirement of all new and used meldew and truckled marriage walls are iket\eing'installed. I understand a strip Type gasket Installed: \, Pg. Between Floors Yes Between Walls Yes Bottom of ddgebeam Yes Weatherproofin The bottomboard will be repaired and/or taped. Yes . pg. Siding on units is installed to manufacturer's specifications. Yes Fireplace chimney installed so as not to allow intrusion of rain water. Yes Miscellaneous Skirting to be installed. Yes No Dryer vent installed outside of s irting. Yes = N/A Range downflow vent installed outside of skirting, s N/ADrainlinessupportedat4footintervals. Yes Electrical crossovers protected. Yes Other: Installer verifies all Information given with this permit worksheet is accurate and true based on the manufacturer's installation instructions and or Rule 15C-1 & 2 Connect all potable water supply piping to an existing water meter, water tap, or other Installer Signatureindependentwatersupplysystems. Pg. Date cr)a—cjJ l (,Q Department of Gro—Management age 2 0 2BuildingDivision BF27 MH Permit orksheet Revised September 28, 2010 j.. :L :31 .i- x"r::' _ - Wit: ,-%•`. _ _ _ _ :' i-`• •.1.: -, '1, IV2 %_:r2 =n '`. .r L _x:_ -_ Fay t931i 795oft . a'f Y: TF' , a ' `'•':=-::".. ~' cam,i0 R v., . ' ,. vw, ve chnologies. s-•. Yr: TN 38 52 0 (B00) - c.:ran Ave o r.ehenwald. B ll?`rai;ol?? i {B ErL+GCiiSOS ABSrlanuracturedHDjrtes, inc{cadin For use ors all 1t3oi it2 a: 1,-1 1D approved "owes a td Jiac3uZsr Building P&tent#55035Q4 and othBT Patie11ts 9e11d11R% GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS: 1. Alt pads are to be installed flat side down. ribbed side up. 2. The Around under the pads should be leveled as smooth as possible with all vegetation removed. Pads to be placed on fully compacted or undisturbed soil, at or below the frost -line, or per local jurisdiction w_Hnttaset-upinstructions or any local or Stale codes. S. Pier & pad spacing will be determined by the manufactured homes' `,e filled will) soil or sand after installation to prevent any accumulation of 4. The Open cells behveen the ribbing on the upper sibe orrule Ades Fayl stagnant water in the pads. the actual soil bearing value. If-n0 soil testing equipment is available - use:sumed soil 5. A pocket penetrometer may be used to determine value of 1000 lbs. 1 square fool. 5. All pad sizes Shown are nominal dimensions aad may vt,r • up to 118'.. 7. The maximum deflection in a single pad is 5!!;' n}easured troin lfie hi0f}s-stooinl to the lowest point of the top face. NOTE: Actual test results were less thin 518") a Pad loads are ilia same when using single stack or double stack blocks. 9. The maximum ioau at any intermediate soil value may be determined as the average of the next lower and next higher soil value given in the table below. 10. If the home manufacturer Shows Soil densities greater than 3000 lbs. Wizen using ABS pads. do not exceed 3000 lbs. sell pier spacings per so up manual. 3000 P`'r SOIL PAD SV_E Oval 16' x 18.5' Oval 1 ' x 22* Oval iT.S` x 22. Ovzl17. 5' x2b. Oval 2V 29` Oval 23.25' x 3' ID CIO. PAR AREA 10D PSF SOIL 2000 For SOIL 1055- 231AIT-06-1000 2fi8' in. 2000 tbs. --_ I25D0 tbs. 4000 tbs. 5000 Ibs• 6000 IbS. — 7500. Ibs.- II : 1055=f 6lAfT-06-1001 J 38Q_ 3 to sq_ In_--- 2657.1bs. _ 80DD {b_. n +":-- i 055-21 __. _ - -- - - 384 e - n 3000 !'os. 6000 lbs. t 9000 lbs.^ 1055- 171AIT-06-1002 v sr b- ; ;... So• Ih. 4000 tbs. i_ 8000lbs. " 1260015s. I11, 55'LIHtI U`v 1L+U encc_ niAlTnf it104 E 6' sq-ii;• i T- 46oglbs 9388 bs.' 93681bs. PAD SIZE, t7 HO. PAD AREA Ova{ 16' x 16` 1055-1 VAIT-06-1 005 256 =q _!r G,!..._ Ovali8.5' x i2._5'_ 2 Oval20' : 0' 1055_ 91A1T-Di}1006 1055- 71 T 06-1007 400 sq. in. I ns-.6_:4lA1T_na_1008 576 sq. in. 10G PSF SOIL 20o0 PSF SOIL 3000 PSF SOIL 1785 tbs 3560 Ibs. 5333 tbs. s 2375 !b. 750 tbs. 7.100 tbs.' _ 71; n the 1 5500 tbs. 8250 Ibs_ ' 4000 tbs. Concrete illoc_ ?tC required to be double bl"Ited_ 11. Any ABS pad configuration may be used to replace a (loin:'• manufacturer's recommended concrete or wood base pad. . 12. ALABAMA ONLY.'Tha 23.25- x 31.25 Io ioss-2o may rsct be installed in the. State of Alabama,_ For ilia state of Alabams all ASS pads stfati-not have inure than 318' deflection. see cnan below for details on correct InStalleiisA; Alabama. fr EYAMPLE: 16, x a0' section (Alabama only) PAD SIZE 1000 PqF 2000 PSF Oval 16" x 18.5` TV 7val17' x22' 3'0 Oval 17.5' x 22.5' 1 3T V — 5. 5' pl1a12i' 1-- 4 r Ott}• "[ f.A al* Cr•° in o = 2 1'6 o r 2O o TENy' S f' agc iR d r 5 ^r`.•' F: -• _ ; . may, «•. - yy::..1 _ s..' r, rvF{ ,'.•:.'- . ' •; x-, F,'..) , e"`. }.w,w• '!1'-' F • r _ e • . i,xe.:=a. ; 'r•,C-,` ,j, tI• 4 i•yy.ts;N JL,,; C.Y%y+,_•,_ i-i•: y •' 4 i+, 13 TEXAS ONLY: 17.5' x 22.5' ID 1r 1055,21 and 23 25' x 31 25' ID 411055-20 may not be installed In the State of Texas. 14 Steel Piers: All pads are tested with steel piers on 1000 PSF sole density unless othernwse noted. (See 15) Attach with (04) 2' #12 x Yi ilex techscrewsMinimumPierBase7V. inches. The MUIII-Pad configuration 35' x 25.5- ID OAIT-06-1002 (03) requires minimum 9 %: pier base. 15. Available pads tested on 2000 PSF soil density using steel piers are: fD #1055-14, 1055-9. 1055-7 and 1055-13. 16. CAUFORNIA: Use an assumed value of 1000 INsq. ft. unless engineenng and calculations are provided. INSTRUCTIONS for Mulit-Pad Configurations MAXIMUM PIER LOAD IN POUNDS: ABS Pad Typos aoll Hearing Maximum 9Val 16' x ta.5' Pad Ova132' !c 18.5_Pau C^yrralpn j03) 4 uare Feel 32'x 18.5- 2.00 Square Feet i ID N 1055 23rA! 706qr, a BlockValue StnpktSlack La-d 100DIlls/sq.Il. Etvel •7=x-22'-Pad-- - -. 2'Pad Corr. alion 03) t10 Square Fea, iDa 1Cfr3•,B aT Oct Pad Coh6gUraifon 1-t•% Daubla sta__20g_g 4000 tbs. rocbf i- - 7 5' x 255' Pad i 5.op SSuaro Fectvel22- r'ad conhgwac!D1 Smgle Sta_hIa1SG, 0 n. `' Snpp Ills• ConfipwatiOn(l73) 3.00 SquareFeet ID—e 6.00 square Feet - --- - - - = - 3 5-= - I>ul rnnfiguraunn SI aPad SingleSta_t1Xxlo iDc ppVy' 1e -•120001bs Concreteblocksareonlyratedat8000SIadCi2000Ills. / . R# pounds, 8001 (pounds and higher must be double stacked. STEP 1 - 17" x 22" ABS Pad Noi•: Use 2 btnrks aide by side tar soy:: ot ar rrorr, than 1.000Ibs /!q f0u11 l. 4. PAD ASSEMBLY STEP 3 -complete Assembly 34" k 22" Multi -Pad Configuration General instructions (on reverse) apply to all m_Iti - pad configurations. 4 he sit x 18 5' r ' ''a bottom is formed by using ('s) 16' x 18.5' ABS Pads. Place (2) 16" x 16 5' side by Side, and place (1) 16, x 18.5' on top, laid in the Posit* dlreclii ,c bottom pads. — -• -_._•- - ,e 34' x 22' pac•r.,,,ilfguralion is formed'by using (3) 17' x 22' ABS Pads_ Place (2) 17' x 22' pads side by side, and (1) 17• x 22' pad on top. The top pad islaidintheoppositedirectiontothebottompads. The 35' x 25.5' pad configuration is formed by using (3) 17 5' x 25.6' ABS Pads. -Yjace (21 r7.3- x :y.5 pads side by side, and (1) 17.5' x 25,5' pad on top. ThetopPadislaidintheoppositedirectiontothebottompads _ T U iQ o C Nth r t<, o RG .'I RE Go C • • o a a rrr. r•• 18008661857 From; Charles Collins ZiOZ Z/L"'XV-S8i'uloo'xsja3allssaurpo,LS8i.99$OpBI//D/tr/S/£1/Lr rtj,„ZJf•Shc1r 27rA t UMLUT CONCr2Et1: RZ;r*, w c DER18. Aran ftL'4Vft.faeLzrorafaltrtt Yla)efes lf-hn mire[ 01 Psi mb; ! B eS? 4tutc d pas R txmtorete •tutlner be eid,ir _ ci F tg)g ryav i fi oDlii the tenor Qv a!dt> ° "tc.tm+tnsiam t 6.it4t= d} tf a roll star; ro wea, Lt9 tleptlt mtrsf a mc mc nx. 21" sc1e,,,? musl ba a mirarmim c! tge on .08 p,ylsr=onitnsm cnotLw.yYt,br yi._ _ 'd4'ep MO ha'&au r!t°raRtootirr9',Pod+LOM tadsa4n a rur n++smusrvr t»+. e.urenw+nrFrwarra tromenamncra+tnoew%tK t'a1917. eVP[ 10191LC ni0v 1, Rc% locJt)urlseiglJpt. Ter orarb fen is n»y tnsmt ttuar8el In tuanunxtpr ag wna, n„c,n;, , :,, --- Th& 11lJi 1 CA 6vaef t is atmched m ttte ca S7623ppH.6f8`?c 'hcL%to ardhyvi ndmoh Iaeo e CAbrscicelind r kc3CDn tAsrk ft. S ..— msttorryu!b d11I1 a bda io a rointrA bolt hol. holtlS,'then Plsca i1Q1 ' d -s . Cp t, ci 3 , f fake sun• all de» and cQ11& o k bhlwr. oata` the h hen briny a -w ew sownbytt:tttno nta nos (ir ok ng ros na to thtf Ilse 3>aed Qs and xbtatvq;o p b qg tXjN Taste a *Wgg. hmrnor, biw!s t,dp 0%. d- of -+- P10'JB tl} 1 htsAh g lttitil P of ti+eads «, t }. 'rhw xt y die tha v,sxf g bo15 LATER41,% kf trot T , t8. FOriV6t 59i lea:e e,nC_, Y,..._.. mrx rc obnflDuietoczttttnt, s` pbo; Qd0amidetopr-:int,,y„ a6 f* tea eQsEan{ Ybt-d-7AC:)- btoaaoutoretehole. ptatz ct4f a t•c,rtoaraua horn tt needrd, take a tat 3aDt19a •X 3' ar sNrvateney Inn ? „ ,i 1[an sv. e thatnaof„-- do V oety, MWXA r, UM lttstat,t , >'nmaflutditrQt,dy dmrattte.W"d bCnB!lCSRnby[fd thn 19. L'fh-'n-inv pall : •1101 cVVY ('+ustaei) or'f1Q1 C1r0 {cty3,jj all ° na to lot Notes: t orstops 12'a te. 1. 1pNoT; it.. HOUSE IS THE ACTUAL t3OX SIZE babcad t]tat'F8'tot>°scfaea r 3 E'-- LOCts7Tf iS F1( T ayil C VY LOCgTiQIVS fMA; ALL WIDTHS- AND •LERtGT S'UP TO 82- C M e ALL WIDTHS. AND LEN.ZTH8-0VpR.52'TO 80Y I HOMES - WITH' 2,- Oaf PITCH_REQUiRr=s PER PLtiRIDA jqr=GL! 6-Wvtems far home fengths UP to 52'-!}ct 8-SY$IC Ms.tbr homes over 52' S Ialane• enct frame tie - Qgvlred at each lateral bracing sYstrm. 8 uA 80 ,Ong sfat ilrer 8If6B 39trd 31N31VA Wjda eOGsat56L9 Ze'.0I LIOL/t3i/L6 I JO I a2Ed HOMES - WITH' 2,- Oaf PITCH_REQUiRr=s PER PLtiRIDA jqr=GL! 6-Wvtems far home fengths UP to 52'-!}ct 8-SY$IC Ms.tbr homes over 52' S Ialane• enct frame tie - Qgvlred at each lateral bracing sYstrm. 8 uA 80 ,Ong sfat ilrer 8If6B 39trd 31N31VA Wjda eOGsat56L9 Ze'.0I LIOL/t3i/L6 I JO I a2Ed RECEJf Vi u MAR 10 2016 i MANUFACTUR'tD -M HOME INSTALLATION FOR SHINGLE ROOF WITH RIDGE VENT SUPPLEMENT TO MANUFACTURED HOME INSTALLATION MANUAL) wiLo N SANFORD 16- 777a SIGyLiNE BRINGING AMERIU HOME. BRINGING AMERIfA fUN. r ,, The technical content of this Installation Manual has been reviewed by PFS Corporation and found to be in accordance with the Federal Manufactured Home Construction and Safety Standard. APPROVED PFS Corporation Madison WI 01 /31 /05 HUD Manufactured Home Construction & Safety Standard INSTALLATION'OF SHINGLE ROOF W__I_T_H RID GE_VEN_T_._ 1. Fold back the underlayment. 8. Complete the installation of the shingles. See figures 2 and 3. 2. Remove the roof sheathing at the ridge beam on one or both halves, which was 9. In the area the ridge vent is to be installed, temporarily secured to the roof at the use a utility knife to cut away the shingles factory. (Note that there is a notch in the and underlayment along the edge of -the sheathing for the installation of the ridge sheathing. vent). 10. Install the ridge vent per the included 3. Bolt the ridge beam halves together as manufacturer installation instructions. See out -lined in the Skyline Corporation figures 4, 5 and 6. Manufactured Home Installation Manual. 11. Install ridge shingles to the area of ridge not 4. See figure 1. Replace sheathing using covered by ridge vent. Start at the vent and 12Ga.x7/16"x1-1/2" staples or 8d twist work towards roof edges. See figure 7. nails 4 inches on center at butt joints and at each truss between joints. Maintain the 12. Nail ridge vent cap shingles in place using 2 gaps between the sheathing and the ridge inch roofing nails. Start at one end of the vent beam where the ridge vent is to be and work towards other end. Nail shingles in installed. place utilizing 5-inch shingle exposure. See figure 8. Seal ends of ridge vent per the vent 5. Tack roofing underlayment back in place. manufacturer installation instructions. 6. Center and staple the additional strip of 13. Install closure cap at eave joint. underlayment on the ridge. Note: See the Skyline Corporation Manufactured 7. Fasten the drip edge to the sheathing at Home Installation Manual for any additional infor- the roofs edge (above underlayment). mation. RIDGE VENT SITE INSTALLED SHINGLES (4 OR 5 COURSES) SEE STEP 9 UNDERLAYMENT PAPER ROOFING UNDERLAYMENT FOLDED BACK FOR / BEAM BOLTING r SHEATHING gat FIG. 1 l FIELD INSTALLED SHEATHING 16" UNDERLAYMENT PAPER 18" SHINGLE - FIELD INSTALL . -- 24" SHINGLE 24" SHINGLE - FIELD INSTALL 30" SHINGLE - FIELD INSTALL 36" SHINGLE - FIELD INSTALL SEE FIG. 3 FOR FASTENING REQUIREMENT IF THE ROOFING IN THE AREA OF THE FRONT RAKE HAS BEEN COVERED TO PROTECT FROM WIND DAMAGE DURING TRANSIT, THE PROTECTIVE COVERING AND FASTENERS ARE TO BE CAREFULLY REMOVED. SEAL THE FASTENER HOLES WITH ASPHALT ROOFING FIG. 2 CEMENT. FASTENERS: USE 1" CROWN x 1" LEG 16 GA. GALVANIZED STAPLES OR 1 1/4" 12 GA. GALVANIZED ROOFING NAILS WITH 3/8" DIAMETER HEADS v 36" SHINGLE 12" NAIL 1" FROM EACH END 5 5/8" ABOVE EXPOSED BUTT & 5/8" ABOVE EACH CUT OUT FIG.3 Y r1u. 4 FIG. 5 FIG. 6 NAIL OR STAPLE RIDGE SHINGLES AS INDICATED. SEE FIG. 3 FOR FASTENER SIZES z- 5" EXPOSURE RIDGE LINE FIG. 7 j FIG. 8 APPLY CAULKING TO CLOSURE CAP f I SECURE CLOSURE CAP WITH #6 x 3/4" SCREWS AT LOCATIONS INDICATED FIG. 9 s E Bringing America Home PFS405 Conforms to HUD D7HCSs 11/13/08 FADDENDUM TO INSTALLATIO= UNITSIE-DOWNS ON SINGLIN WIND ZONE II OR 4. 35/12 max. roof pitch 12 4. 35r i Sidewall Straps and Anchors to be spaced 4'-0" o.c. max. Wind Z m Zone If or III, Exposure D. v? T m G1ST.. q E PE19600312 — to STATE OF I Q ; 9 % Ok, Floor NDIAOI:- ss/ oNiA tt G`` H Jeffrey T. Legault Q 2008.11.13 r09: 41:02-05'00'____ Unit Table 1 Width H max. Strap An le max. 12' 48" 21.7 degrees 14' 48" 20.0 degrees 16' 48" 18.6 degrees G 7 4 Endwall each end of or III, Straps and Anchors at unit at Wind Zone II Exposure D. Factory installed tie down strap See note 1. 10 2016 Site installed tie - down strap. \ Main kBeam \ typical). Axz:---------------------------- Typical pier and footing Sidewall Tie -Down Straps Bracket 7- Strap angle typical) Ground anchor (typical) Main Beam Pier End Wall Tie- 30 - 45 Down Strap degrees \ Anchor with Stabilizer Plate -------------- Endwall Tie -Down Straps Notes• 1) For strap to I -Beam attachment refer to the Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual. 2) For all other requirements refer to the Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual. 3) Straps and anchors to be rated for 3150 lbs. of working stress (min.). 4) Main 1-Beam spacing is 99.5" for 14' and 16' wides, 82.5" for 12' wides. 5) Exposure D is intended for homes located within 1500 feet to the coast in Wind Zone 11 or Ill. Sec.: 4 7. 40n-S_nnan nas - nno III.: 51 Page 93B INS Bringing America Home r 1r m3 a 1 xf6 E co0 Floor H 4.35112 max. roof pitch 4.35 ADDENDUM TO INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR TIE -DOWNS ON DOUBLEWIDE UNITS LOCATED IN WIND ZONE II OR III, EXPOSURE D. PF#o5 Conformsfo HUD WICSS 10/20/09 Sidewall Straps and Anchors to be spaced 5'-4" O.C. max. at Wind Zone II and-96-max.-Sidewall. Height--- ------ Factory installed Sidewall Straps and Anchors to be 4'-0" tie -down strap o.c. max at Wind Zone II and 108" max. Sidewall Height, or at Wind Zone III. Main I -Beam See note 1. Site installed tie -down strap typical). r \---------------------------- i\` __ Centerline strap and ground anchor. See setup manual. Typical pier and footing Sidewall Tie -Down Straps Table 1 Sidewall Height 96" sidewall Height Unit Width 24' Wind Zone II Wind Zone III H (max.) 36" Strap Angle max. 17.8 degrees H max.) 48" Strap Angle max.) 23.2 degrees 28' 33" 14.3 degrees 48" 20.3 degrees 32' 25" 10.1 degrees 47" , 18.6 degrees 108" sidewall Height 24' 48" 23.2 degrees 35" 17.3 degrees 28' 48" 20.3 degrees 32" 13.8 degrees 32' 48" 19.0 degrees 25" 10.1 degrees_ 1 Endwall Straps and Anchors Required at each end of unit at Wind Zone II or III, Exposure D. See Table 2 for number Req'd. Table 2 Number of Straps Sidewall Height Unit Width Wind Zone II Wind Zone III 96" sidewall Height 24' 6 8 28' 8 10 32' 8 10 108" sidewall Height 24' 8 8 28' 8 10 32' 10 12 V--- Strap angle typical) Ground anchor (typical) 11'%%111111 f111111' T. Lee"'*, Q G1STEgFO PE19600312 fl ' STATE OF NA' 1 NG?`• Q Jeff Legault 2009. 10.14 11: 46:44-04'00' Bracket Main Beam Pier End Wall Tie- 30 - 45 Down Strap degrees \ Anchor with Stabilizer Plat Endwall Tie -Down Straps Notes: 1) For strap to I -Beam attachment refer to the Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual. 2) For all other requirements refer to the Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual. 3) Straps and anchors to be rated for 3150 lbs. of working stress (min.). 4) Main ]-Beam spacing is 99.5" for 28' and 32' wides, 82" for 24' wides. 5) Exposure D is intended for homes located within 1500 feet to the coast in Wind Zone II or 111. Sec.: 4 III.: 51 Pa9e 93C s INS Bringing America Home i See Detail 'A' f 20'-0" max. Carport Addendum toAnstallation Instructions :for' --,--. Doublewides':.with Site Attached'Carport, Tie -Down Straps and Ground Anchors req'd at T-4" o.c. max. at Wind Zone II and 4'.0" o.c. max. at Wind Zone III. Support, Design and Perimeter blocking required 4'- max. at Carport area. Connections for Carport by Mi . fMn. footing size to beothers, and shall meet requiements of local authority. 20'x20"x4" or equivalent Field Installed Diagonal i Tie -Down Strap Factory Installed Vertical — Tie -Down Strap. Strap Angle - H - See table. See table. Typical pier Sidewall Application Third party listed roof trussTypical Site installed carport. Design and attachment by others. Attach Carport to 2x4 or 2x6 rail as required by Carport design and local authority. Factory installed rail may be covered with exterior painted metal. Vinyl Siding Detail 'A' Site Installed carport. Design and attachment by others. Attach Carport to 2x10 rail as required by j Carport design and local authority. Third party Ilsled roof truss Factory installed rail may be covered with exterior painted metal. Vinyl Siding Alt. Detail'A' Y!_._._._._._. Typical ground anchor Carport Support, Design and Connections for Carport and flashing & siding by others, and shall meet requiements of local authority. Factory Installed Vertical Tie -Down Strap. V_. Sec.: 4 III.: 51 Pg. 91 Attach Carport directly to endwall framing prior to installing siding on endwall. Perimeter blocking required 4'-0" O.C. max at Carport area. Min. footing size to be 16"xl6"x4" or equivalent. T Typical pier Typical Endwall Application 90" max. sidewall Wind Zone II or III 108" max. sidewall Wind Zone II 108" max. sidewall Wind Zone III H) Max. Pier Height inches) Max. Strap Angle Degrees) H) Max. Pier Height inches) Max. Strap Angle Degrees) H) Max. Pier Height inches) Max. Strap Angle Degrees) Unit Width 24' 48 23.2 33 16.4 48 23.2 26' or 281 48 1 20.3 36.5 15.7 48 20.3 32' 1 48 1 19.0 34.5 1 13.9 48 19.0 12" min. pier height For Triplewides use 26 or 28' wide information. PFS#°2 Conforms to HUD MHCSS U11 u l n Nrr r PE`( T. LFG, iii PE19600312 o •' STATE OF '• Z F Ii sS/ONA1 tSNG\\\'' Jeffrey T. g Legault. PE 2014.07.16 16:38:38-04'00' Notes: 8/18/14 1) Applicable to all double or triple wide units at Wind Zone II or III. 20 psf max. roof live load. 9' max. sidewall height. Carport roof to have a 8 psf max. dead load and a 2 psf min. dead load. 2) Piers and footings required under main I -Beams per normal requirements. 3) 1000 psf min. soil bearing capacity required. 4) Tie -down straps and ground anchors to rated for a minimum working load of 3150 lbs. 5) See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual for additional setup requirements. 6) This addendum is not applicable to 5/12 roof pitch units. s SHE Add_ endum`to.lnstallation-instructions for:Doublewides Bringing America Home ...with:5M'2'k6'04_-Pitch & Site Attached Carport. See Detall 'A' 5/12 roof pitch max Tie -Down Straps and 20'-0" max. 12 Ground Anchors req'd at E 20'-0" max. 4'-0" O.C. max. 5 Carport Carport i Support, Design and Perimeter blocking required 4'- 0" o.c. max at Carport area. Support, Design and Connections Connections for Carport by Min. footing size to be for Carport and flashing 3 siding by others, and shall meet 20'x20"x4" or equlvalenL others, and shall meet requiements requlements of local authority. / Field Installed Diagonal of local authority. Tie -Down Strap Factory Installed Vertical — \ Tie -Down Strap. Strap Angle - H - See table. See table. Typical pier Typical Sidewall Application Site Installed carport. Design and attachment by others. Attach Carport to 2x10 rail as required by Carport design and local authority. 0. .... T. r Q• O•• PE19600312 STATE OF zz CN ON ALtE v III11 JeffreyT. Legault. PE V']g 2014.07.1616:41:41 04'00' 7400-S-006Q.60B, 7-420S-078C.1 party listed roof truss Factory Installed rail may be covered with exterior vinyl. Vinyl Siding Detail' Factory Installed Vertical =s TIe-Down Strap. 3............... .11-------------------------- 7._V ._ ....... ........ I Typical pier Typical ground anchor Typical Endwall Application Sec.: 4 Ill.: 51 Pg. 91 B Attach Carport directly to endwall framing prior to Installing siding on endwall. Perimeter blocking required 4'-0" o.c. max at Carport area. Min. footing size to be 16"x16"x4" or Wind Zone II Wind Zone III H) Max. Pier Height inches) Max. Strap Angle Degrees) H) Max. Pier Height inches) Max. Strap Angle Degrees) Unit Width 24' 48 23.2 37 18.3 26' or 28' 48 1 20.3 1 39 16.7 32' 48 1 19.0 1 35 14.1 12" min, pier height. I Notes: P/FS #02 1) Applicable to all doublewide units at Wind Zone II or III.20 psf max. roof live load. 9' max. sidewall height. Carportroof to have a 8 psf max. dead load and a 21isf min. dead load. 2) Piers and footings required under main I -Beams per normal requirements. Conorm, to NUDEMHCSS onorms to 3) 1000 psf min. soil bearing capacity required. 8/ t>sr14 4) Tie -down straps and ground anchors to rated for a minimumlworking load of 3150 lbs. 5) See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual for additional setuo requirements. BRUNE Bringing America Home 20'-0" max. i Carport Support, Design and Connections for Carport by others, and shall meet requiements of local authority. Addendum to -Installation Illistructiors for Shed Roof .Singlewide's .with, Site'Attached Carport See Detail'A' i iPerimeter blocking required 4' o.c, max, at Carport or area. Min. footing size to be 20'x20'x4' or equivalent. Factory Installed Vertical Tie -Down Strap. ; Typical ground anchor-1 Remove vinyl siding to expose ridge for attachment. Replace after site work completed. I Site installed carport. Design and attachment by others. i I Attach Carport to ridge beam as required by Carport design and local authority. Detail 'A' Sec. 4 III.: 51 PQ. 91 D Tie -Down Straps and Ground Anchors req'd at 4'-0" max. at Wind Zone II and 2'-8" max. at Wind Zone III. Field Installed Diagonal Tie -Down Strap H - See note 7 3V -------------- Strap Angle - Typical pierSeenote8. Typical Sidewall Application U.L. listed roof truss Ridge beam - 3 full layers of 19/32 plywood - glued and fastened together. Shed roof sidewall PFS#02 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 8/18/14 Carport Support, Design and Connections for Carport and flashing & siding by others, and shall meet requiements Of local authority. — Factory Installed Vertical Tie -Down Strap. V — PEY T. PE19600312 STATE OF Q ONA Jeffrey T. Legault. Q PE r 2014.07.16 16:29:05-04'00' Attach Carport directly to endwall framing prior to installing siding on endwall. Perimeter blocking required 4'-0" o.c, max at Carport or area. Min. footing size to be 16-x16'x4' or equivalent, Typical pier Typical Endwall Application Notes• 1) Applicable to 12', 14' and 16' Shed roof singlewide units at Wind Zone II or III. 20 psf max. roofliveload. Carport roof to have a 8 psf max. dead load and a 2 psf min. dead load. 2) Piers and footings required under main i-Beams per normal requirements. 3) 1000 psf min. soil bearing capacity required. 4) Tie -down straps and ground anchors to rated for a minimum working load of 3150 lbs. 5) See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual for additional setup requirements. 6) This addendum is not applicable to 5/12 roof pitch units. 7) Hmax. = 48". Hmin. = 12". 8) The max. strap angle is 23.2 degrees for 12' wides, 20.0 degrees for 14' wides and 18.9 degreesfor16' wides. s ENE Bringing America Home 20'-0" max. 19'-8" max for 16' wides Carport Support, Design and Connections for Carport by others, and shall meet requlements of local authority. Factory Installed Vertical —i Tie -Down Strap. Typical ground anchor Adderidum-to Installation Instructions -for.... Singlewides with Site Attached Carport Detall'A' Tie -Down Straps and Ground Anchors req'd at 4'-0" max. at Wind Zone 11 and Wind Zone III. Perimeter blocking required 4'- 0' o.c. max. at Carport area. Min. footing size to be 20'40"x4' or equivalent. Field Installed Diagonal Tie -Down Strap H - See note 7 Y._._._._._.— I Strap Angle - Typical pier See note 8. Typical Sidewall Application U.L. listed roof truss Site Installed carport. Design and attachment by others. 7extedor installed ybe Id with painted Attach Carport to 2xl0 rail as required by Carport design and local authority. ell,• I Vinyl Siding Detail 'A' Sec.: 4 III.: 51 Pg. 91A Attach Carport directly to endwall framing prior to Installing siding on endwall. Carport j j Perimeter blocking required 4'-0". Support, Design and Connections for Carport and flashing d siding by others, and shall meet requie ients of local authority. o.c. max. at Carport. Min. footing size to be 16"x16'x4" or equivalent. Factory Installed Vertical i Tie -Down Strap. 11111111111///// T. LFG PE19600312 a STATE OF J a Jeffrey T. Legault. PE r 2014.07.1616:39:28 04'00' Typical pier Typical Endwall Application PF#®2 Conforms to HUD MHCSS I 8/18/14 Notes: j 1) Applicable to IT, 14' and 16' singlewide units at Wind Zone II or III. 20 psf max. roof live load. Carport roof to have a 8 psf max. dead load and a 2 psf min. dead load. 2) Piers and footings required under main I -Beams per nori al requirements. 3) 1000 psf min. soil bearing capacity required. 4) Tie -down straps and ground anchors to rated for a minimum working load of 3150 lbs. 5) See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual for additional setup requirements. 6) This addendum is not applicable to 5/12 roof pitch units. 7) Hmax. = 48". Hmin. = 12". 8) The max. strap angle is 23.2 degrees for 12' wides, 20.Odegrees for 14' wides and 18.6 degrees for 16' wides. 01 1111E Bringing America Home Porch I Addendum to Installation Instructions for Applicable To: Multi -Section Units with End Porches All Double or Triple Wides All Wind Zones, All Roof Loads Note A: Install a 5" bead of exterior grade caulk at the following locations: 1) At porch endwall mating line, from the porch deck up. 2) At porch floor mating line, from endwall out. 3) Along porch floor/wall intersection, each side of mating line. i Porch Endwall i i See note A. number 3 I Mating Line Mating Line I I I I te A, number 1 ee note A, number 3 e A, number 2 i I Instructions: 1) Brings units together as described in the Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual. 2) Install exterior grade caulk as at the porch;floor/wall mating line as described in note A and detail above. 3) All other aspects of the setup shall be per the Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manual. i PF,S#02 Conforms to HUD MHCSs 9/22/14 Sec.: 4 Ref: 51 Page 141 Ow u Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Installation Manu- al 4-48 pg. 1 BW4 216 . 7 7 , , (qAIAo 1EN Bringing America Home. Bringing America Fun. 01 CE 0 M PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. HUD MHCSS Using the Manual 1/15/09 This manual is organized into a series of steps that will take you through the entire installation process using only those pagesrequiredforthespecifichomebeinginstalled. First, review the entire manual, including the Introduction chapter. As you read it, identify sections of the manual that you will need; identify other documents or information you will need; construct lists of toolsandmaterialsrequiredforyourparticularinstallation; and make sure you have everything you need before starting work. After reviewing the entire manual, refer to the sequence of installation steps in the table below. Identify the pathway for yourinstallationandfollowthearrowsdownward. Select either Single Section Home or a Multi -Section Home and choose the col- umn corresponding to the home's foundation type, either Pier and Ground Anchor or Load -Bearing Perimeter Wall (seeDefinitions, p. 4). Then complete the work in each of the sections starting with Getting Started. If using an alternative (proprietary) foundation system, the installation process will change from that described in this manual. rr.,.,—it tho CVCtPm manufacturer directions for instructions. See page 6 for alternative foundation system criteria. PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. lii Introduction Conforms to HUD MHCSS 12/16/09 This installation manual contains instructions that must be followed for the proper installation of the home. It complies withtheHUDModelManufacturedHomeInstallationStandards. Please read all instructions and any other documents (includ- ing addendum pages and supplements) that may apply to the specific home prior to commencing site work or installation. This installation manual covers permits and site work through final inspection of the installation. It covers both single andmulti -section homes installed over pier and anchor, load bearing crawl space walls and basement foundations. It containsinstructions, including specifications and procedures, for the set and hookup of manufactured homes to be used as single- family dwellings. The importance of correct installation cannot be over -emphasized. Correct installation is absolutely essential to home- owner satisfaction and the structural integrity of the home. All instructions must be followed to provide the customer with asafe, quality home. No manual can cover all circumstances that may exist for certain home designs or building sites. For questions, furtherclarification, or if you encounter conditions at the site or in the design of the home or its foundation not covered by thismanual, please contact the manufacturer (see Resources, p. 4), a registered engineer, or registered architect. Supplemental addendum pages may be included with this manual. Supplements include requirements not covered in thismanualorthatsupercedethemanualinstructions. Once the home installation is complete, leave this manual with the home. IMPORTANT NOTICES The home manufacturer is not responsible for installation or for the materials supplied by the set-up crew at thetimeofinstallation. The installer may be responsible for any deviations from the installation instructions of thismanual. To keep the home in compliance with its warranty, the home installation must follow the procedures described inthismanualorotherproceduresapprovedbythemanufacturer. Deviation from the instructions in this manualmayvoidthehome's warranty. Any alterations or changes to the home shall be approved by a registered engi- neer or registered architect and may still be subject to warranty violations. When an installer does not provide support and anchorage in accordance with the approved manufacturer's in- stallation instructions, or encounters site conditions (such as areas that are subject to flood damage or highseismicrisk) or other conditions that prevent the use of the instructions provided in this manual, the installermustobtainspecialsite -specific instructions from the manufacturer or use a design approved by a registeredengineerorregisteredarchitect. The installer must possess a valid installation license as a manufactured home installer. If the installer identifies failures of the home to comply with the Federal Manufactured Home Construction andSafetyStandards (the HUD Code), the installer must notify the manufacturer and retailer. ++,, The Technical Content of the `°F ,:Fy T. Le,I/"/, , Manual has been reviewed PFS Corporation and found to be - PE19600312inconformancewiththeFederal Manufactured Home Construction %\ STATE OF ;`QandSafetyStandards •, o N01ANP.:'aki; F .. S/ONA SAFETY Q Jeff Legault J 2009.7 7 -0Therearepotentialhazardsassociatedwiththeinstallationofamanufacturedhome. Home installers are licensed, and asexperiencedprofessionals, should recognize these hazards, be qualified to work with them, and be capable of providingsafeworkpracticesandequipmentthatminimizetherisksofinjury. Only qualified persons should install a manufactured home. As qualified professionals in the field of manufactured homeinstallation, installers are the experts and must be aware of the hazards and conditions faced. Warnings are publishedthroughoutthismanualasreminders. These reminders may not cover all hazards, all potential hazards, or all possibleconsequencesofimproperorunsafeinstallationpractices. Construction crews should be trained in the skills required and be supervised by experienced personnel. Installers shouldregularlyinspectworkperformedbycrewsandsubcontractors. Obey OSHA regulations, particularly those related to home construction, such as Title 29 Code of Federal RegulationsPart1926. For copies of OSHA regulations, call (202) 512-1800 or visit www.osha.uov on the web. 33:19 4-48 PG. 1) PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 4 RESOURCES Manufacturer contact information: Skyline Corporation P.O. Box 743 Elkhart Indiana 46515 574)294-6521 574) 295-8601 - FAX www.skylinecorp.com Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manufactured Housing US Department of Housing and Urban Development 451 Seventh Street, SW, Room 9164 Washington, DC 20410-8000 Telephone: (202) 708-6423 or (800) 927-2891 FAX: (202) 708-4213 00# 05 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 State Administrative AgenciesAlistofSAAsmaybefound on the web at www.hud.gov or by contacting the Office of Regulatory Affairs and Manu- factured Housing. FEDERAL PREEMPTIONThishomewasengineered, constructed, and inspected in conformance with the Federal Manufactured Home Construc- tion and Safety Standards (MHCSS) of the US Department of Housing and Urban Development (24 CFR Part 3280, commonly referred to as the "HUD Code") in effect on the date of manufacture. These Standards set forth minimum re- quirements for the design and construction of manufactured homes designed to be used as dwellings. Individual states, counties and cities shall have no authority to establish standards regarding the construction or safety ofamanufacturedhome. A metal certification label is affixed to each section of the home to certify that it has been con- structed and inspected to comply with these Standards. The design plans and in -plant construction of all homes are in- spected by independent third party agencies to assure compliance with the Standards. The installation of the home and any alterations made to the home shall conform to the requirements of the MHCSS andtheHUDModelManufacturedHomeInstallationStandards. These installation instructions are minimum requirements. Applicable local or state laws may have more stringent installation requirements than outlined in this manual and must befollowed. Consult with the local authority having jurisdiction (LAHJ) for regulations that may require licenses and/or per- mits or which may affect procedures described in this manual. DEFINITIONSANCHORASSEMBLY. Any device or other means designed to transfer loads to the ground. ANCHORING EQUIPMENT. Ties, straps, cables, turnbuckles, chains, and other approved components, including tension- ing devices that are used to secure a manufactured home to anchor assemblies. ANCHORING SYSTEM. A combination of anchoring equipment and anchor assemblies that will, when properly designedandinstalled, resist the uplift, overturning, and lateral forces on the manufactured home. BASEMENT. A load -bearing perimeter wall foundation that includes habitable space (finished or unfinished, heated or unheated) partly or completely below grade. d with her load- or non -load CRA LSPACE. The space underneath the home's systm, walls. The ground may be covered with a concre eoslab or by a plastic ground tcover. Crawlspace walls amust be ring meter vented. CROSSOVERS. Utility interconnections between sections of multi -section homes, including heating and cooling ducts, electrical circuits, and water pipes, drain plumbing, and gas lines. DATA PLATE. An information sheet located at the main electrical panel, in the utility room, in a bedroom closet, or in acabinetinthekitchen. It contains a unique identification number and identifies the wind zone, roof load zone, and cli- matic zone for which the home was constructed. DIAGONAL TIE. A tie intended to resist horiz. or shear forces, but which may resist vertical, uplift, and overturning forces. FOOTING. That portion of the support system that transmits loads directly to the soil. GROUND ANCHOR. A specific anchoring assembly device designed to transfer home loads to the ground. e Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. H-BEAM. Steel H-beams are often used to support a home over a basement or crawlspace. They span acrossYOXthefounun- H 1D dation from sidewall to sidewall, typically with an intermediate support pier and footing (typically in the center point re- sulting in a line of piers under the centerline of a double section home). INFORMATION PACKET. A set of important documents provided with the home including warranties, information on highwindcoverage, and other features of the specific home. INSTALLATION LICENSE. The proof that an installer meets the requirements for installing manufactured homes undertheHUD -administered installation program. LABELED. Equipment or materials to which has been attached a label, symbol, or other identifying mark of a certifiedtestinglaboratory, inspection agency, or other organization concerned with product evaluation. The label indicatescompliancewithnationallyrecognizedstandardsorteststodeterminesuitableusageinaspecifiedmanner. LISTED OR CERTIFIED. Included in a list published by a nationally recognized testing laboratory, inspection agency, orotherorganizationconcernedwithproductevaluationthatmaintainsperiodicinspectionofproductionoflistedequip- ment or materials, and whose listing states either that the equipment or material meets nationally recognized stan- dards or has been tested and found suitable for use in a specified manner. LOAD -BEARING PERIMETER WALL FOUNDATION. A support system for the home whereby the home is mechanicallyfastenedtoastructuralwall(s) that transfers gravity, lateral, and uplift loads to the ground. LOCAL AUTHORITY HAVING JURISDICTION (LAHJ). The state, city, county, municipality, utility, or organization thathaslocalresponsibilitiesthatmustbecompliedwithduringtheinstallationofamanufacturedhome. MUST. Indicates a mandatory requirement. N/A. Indicates not applicable. PIER. That portion of the support system between the footing and the manufactured home, exclusive of shims. Types ofpiersinclude, but are not limited to: (1) manufactured steel stands; (2) pressure -treated wood; (3) manufactured con- crete stands; (4) concrete blocks; and (5) portions of foundation walls. PIER AND GROUND ANCHOR FOUNDATION. A support system for the home that employs piers under the chassis andotherlocationstosupportgravityloadsandemploysgroundanchorsandtiedowns (the stabilizing system) to resistlateralandupliftloads. PERIMETER BLOCKING. Regularly spaced piers supporting the sidewalls and marriage line of the home. Some homesrequireperimeterblockinginadditiontosupportsunderthehome's frame. QUALIFIED. Has the necessary knowledge and skills gained from experience and training that will allow performance ofthejobsafely, competently, and in accordance with all applicable codes, standards, rules, and regulations. Meets allnecessaryqualificationtestsincludinganylicenseandcertificationrequirementsthatmaybeineffectintheareawherethehomewillbeinstalled. RAMADA. Any freestanding roof or shade structure, installed or erected over a manufactured home or any portionthereof. SHOULD. Indicates a recommendation that is strongly advised but not mandatory. SHALL. Indicates a mandatory requirement. SITE FOR A MANUFACTURED HOME. A designated parcel of land designed for the accommodation of one manufac- tured home, its accessory buildings or structures, and accessory equipment, for the exclusive use of the occupants ofthehome. SKIRTING. A weather -resistant material used to enclose the perimeter, under the living'area of the home, from the bottomofthemanufacturedhometograde. STABILIZING SYSTEM. All components of the anchoring and support systems, such as piers, footings, ties, anchoringequipment, anchoring assemblies, or any other equipment, materials and methods of construction, that support andsecurethemanufacturedhometotheground. SUPPORT SYSTEM. Pilings, columns, a combination of footings, piers, foundation walls, caps, and shims and any com- bination thereof that will, when properly installed, support and secure the manufactured home to the ground. TIE. Straps, cable, or securing devices used to connect the manufactured home to anchoring assemblies. UTILITY CONNECTION. The connection of the manufactured home to utilities that include, but are not limited to, electric- ity, water, sewer, gas, or fuel oil. VERTICAL TIE. A tie intended to resist uplifting and overturning forces. WIND ZONE. The areas designated on the Basic Wind Zone Map, as further defined by the MHCSS. 9:22 ine Corporation (4-48 PG. V) X r Z m n O X U O 1 O Z Z to D rr O Z D Z c D r 5 to PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 0 HUD MHCSS 1/I5109 ENGINEER'S STAMP Certain pages of this manual display the seal of a registered engineer. Federal guidelines only require the seal from one state to be displayed, but the details herein apply to all states. SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL This icon indicates an important warning. It is critical to heed these warnings. i , // This icon indicates a recommended best practice. While not required, following these practices will result in a superior installation, reducing the chance that cosmetic or dura- bility related complaints might arise. ABBREVIATIONS ABS Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene max. Maximum American National Standards Insti- MHCSS Manufactured Home Construction and ANSI tute Safety Standards APA American Plywood Association min. Minimum American Society for Testing and Ma- mph Mile(s) per hourASTMterials American Wood Preservers Associa- NEC National Electric Code AWPA tion CFM Cubic feet per minute NFIP National Flood Insurance Program CFR Code of Federal Regulations NFPA National Fire Protection Association DWV Drain, Waste, Vent O.C. On center Occupational Safety and Health Admini- EMT Electrical metallic tubing OSHA stration Federal Emergency Management oz Ounce(s) FEMA Agency ft Foot/feet P. Page Gauge psf Pounds per square foot ga US Department of Housing and Ur- psi Pounds per square inch HUD ban Development in Inch(es) SAA State Administrative Agency LAHJ Local Authority Having Jurisdiction sq ft Square foot/feet Ib(s) Pound(s) ALTERNATIVE FOUNDATION SYSTEMSAlternativefoundationsystemsordesignsarepermitted if they are approved by the home manufacturer and the manufac- turer's DAPIA, and are in accordance with either of the following: Systems or designs are manufactured and installed in accordance with their listings by a nationally recognized testing agency based on a nationally recognized testing protocol; or System designs are prepared by a registered engineer or a registered architect or tested and certified by a regis- tered engineer or registered architect in accordance with acceptable engineering practice and are manufacturedandinstalledsoasnottotakethehomeoutofcompliancewiththeManufacturedHomeConstructionandSafety Standards. DISPLAY AND STORAGE OF THE HOME WEATHER PROTECTIONIftheinstallationisnotstarted immediately upon delivery of the home, the retailer and/or installer has the responsibility toensuretheexteriorweatherprotectioncoveringofmarriagewallsandtheroofofhomeswithhingedroofshasnotbeen Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. damaged during shipment. Inspect the home immediately upon the delivery and frequently during storage. Promptlytearsinthehomeclosurematerialstopreventdamagefromtheelements. Inspect and repair roof shingles and siding asneeded. SUPPORTING A HOME FOR DISPLAY When a new or used manufactured home is to be displayed at a retail location, temporarily block and support the home. Set up single -section homes with single block piers spaced no further apart than 12 feet o.c. beneath each I-beam. Thetireandaxlesystemmaybeusedasoneoftheserequiredsupports, and the hitch jack may be used as another. Locatethefirstpiernofurtherthantwofeetfromtherearendofthehome (Figure 1). Place additional piers along the perimeteroneithersideofopeningsgreaterthanfourfeet (i.e. sliding glass doors, bay windows, etc.). For multi -section homes, locate additional piers along the marriage line under support columns. These locations will bemarkedbythemanufacturer. Figure I. Supporting a home for display Grade n 12'-0• 12'0• 72'-0' 12'-0• 72'-0• For all homes, place footings below each pier. Footings may be placed directly on the surface grade without excavationandmaybeABSpads, 2 x 10 by 16 inch long pressure treated lumber or 16" x 16" by 4 inch thick concrete pads. SUPPORTING A HOME FOR STORAGE To prevent damage to homes being stored but not on display (i.e. people shall not be permitted inside the home) for a pe- riod exceeding 30 days, locate piers below each I-beam no further than two feet from each end of the home and at theapproximatecenterofthehomelength. CUSTOMIZATION OF THE MODEL MANUAL This manual is based on a model manufacturer's installation manual used by many different companies. It may have beencustomizedfromthemodelbythemanufacturer. The table below lists the locations where this manual differs from themodelmanual. e s-.,_:•: :: r. ,,.--.:;:[1 afi'w'.; i':''_:zii:il_Vr;:`n'.vi' - rcevrz.lseQ rlmgeUsroor tletallS to-Sk'/Ilne Sysem:"+'aJ' f ;''r':+!1x•-u.;1_,j:':M .: .._..: ..• sra,._ _..r ,. t•+ i.:rata;,r_,ii'wil'vSui.•'.t4 Multi -section set Step 6, 7 & 8 Revised mating line connections to conform to Skyline system. Corinect cross Dyers t Ste 'y ,rz , , :.5• ., r , . •., , .., r.,:. ,, x.. w ,r P:•; ,, *? t.,r ,, c, ;,_ ` swyRe'visecJ Heat duct crdss'overs;toconformYoµSkylirie:systems , Install stabilizing System Step 1 Revise anchor location requirements to conform to Skyline stem. cfUtilifies; yStep 2 ' ' ' Revis to bate ne s s e'water r:dnp pan,'drainage"to;Skyli y tein: r• 22 4- 48 PG. 1) 0— orms to MHCSS PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 4 r'. ,- , J Q z Q z O 1- Q J J Q v7 z_ Z O I= O a W O U W Z J Y in E•' Getting Started This chapter covers a few steps that, taken now, will avoid problems later in the installation process. A. STEP 2:"CONFIRMAT- WIND ZONt t V" STEPLr3`rCONF.IRM THERMAL'• Z 8; ^STEP HECK LOCAL=CODES Conforms to HUD MHCSS t •• . 1",'•rry_ = r Yetir'r'I.i" i.. M1l i '. r 1i. r "- Y •. MCH 10) Y i:} .;l cl,;!•r-.y-'rL" ,'' i {.-- s tr c''-,'i 1 URE PERMITS (p`'12)` STEP 1. LOCATE THE DATA PLATE Locate the data plate inside the home (Figure 2), typically on a wall panel or door face near the electrical panel, or master bedroom closet. The information on the data plate will be used to verify that the home was designed for the proper location. STEP 2. CONFIRM WIND ZONE From Table 1, identify the wind zone for the home. Verify that the home conforms to the following rules and any special requirements determined by the IAHJ. No home may be located in a higher wind zone than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for Wind Zone II cannot be placed in Wind Zone III.) A home may be located in a lower wind zone than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for Wind Zone II can be placed in either Wind Zone II or I.) Homes located within 1,500 feet of the coastline in Wind Zones II and III must be designed to withstand exposure 'D' conditions. This will be indicated on the data plate. If the home does not conform to these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately. 4-48 Figure 2. Sample data plate V&*IFZZA Site Appropriateness. If the site is not accessible, not appro- priate for the planned support system or cannot be properly graded, notify the purchaser, the retailer and HUD with the rea- sons why the site is unsuitable. Do not install the home until all issues are remedied_ 9 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Conforms to HUD MHCSS TABLE 1. WIND ZONE BY LOCALITY All counties except those listed below as within Wind Zone III Parishes of Acadia, Allen, Ascension, Assumption, Calcasieu, Cameron, East Baton Rouge, East Feliciana, Evangeline, Iberia, Iberville, Jefferson Davis, Lafayette, Livingston, Pointe Coupee, St. Helena, St. James, St. JohntheBaptist, St. Landry, St. Martin, St. Tammany, Tangipahoa, Vermillion, Washington, West Baton Rouge, andWestFeliciana Counties of Barnstable, Bristol, Dukes, Nantucket, and Plymouth w ................aa.-a.A_ ..:a:...'. w..0 5...:..'.'= Counties of Beaufort, Brunswick, Camden, Chowan, Columbus, Craven, Currituck, Jones, New Hanover, Onslow, Pamlico, Pasquotank, Pender, Perquimans, Tyrrell, and Washington Courities'of Beaufort; Berkeley; Charie§ton;rCollefon D6r6Fi1este,` Georgetown; Hoary; Jasperand.lNillfamsbug; Counties of Aransas, Brazoria, Calhoun, Cameron, Chambers, Galveston, Jefferson, Kennedy, Kleberg, Mata- gorda, Nueces, Orange, Refugio, San Patricio, and Willacy Doer.,.=. L.,. - __ __'_ - .. .. ... ..ntta•{-T-• t .. Entire state Coas pns as,d&te T n is t-... .•. n _, tal regi { rmin'ed byahe 90 mp o ai h on the ANSI/ASCE;7 88 map)" 1: ; t;r ,i_ti:. 1:.'f:".`35 °JcCountiesofBroward, Charlotte, Collier, Dade, Franklin Pinellas, and Sarasota , Gulf, Hendry, Lee, Martin, Manatee, Monroe, Palm Beach, aristies'.of ilefferson; Ca'Fourche; Orleans; Plaquemines; St. Bem_aed;'St. CI Counties of Carteret, Dare, and Hyde STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE From Figure 3. Thermal (UP) zone map, identify the thermal (UO) zone for the home. Verify that the home conforms to the following rules. No home may be located in an area with a higher thermal zone number than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for Thermal Zone 2 cannot be placed in Thermal Zone 3.) A home may be located in a lower thermal zone than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for Thermal Zone 2 may be placed ineitherThermalZone2or1.). In no case may a home designated for installation in the "Humid & Fringe Climate," as identified on the data plate, be located outside of this regionTable2). If the home does not conform to these rules, contact the manufacturer immediately. HIVI Skyline Corporation (4-48 9 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 10 i Conforms to HUD MHCSS Figure 3. Thermal (UO) zone map s 1 2 7 r..., p 0 O LLv lw 11.116 Um am TABLE 2. HUMID AND FRINGE CLIMATE ZONES All counties and locations All counties and locations ,...,, ....;.. a '^ 31P7' ,....1.,..-''r ;1LY^--'•- ., ...,,.;S:YC .. ,..Y, . - :^,c:.•..---'—.— i;•l. ::i.,._.,. Alunties and-locationsrs :.. _ .. N awe, . c ; O :a'.. Counties of Adams, Amite, Claiborne, Clarke, Copiah, Covington, Forrest, Franklin, George, Greene, Hancock, Harrison, Hinds, Issaquena, Jackson, Jasper, Jefferson, Jefferson Davis, Jones, Lamar, Lawrence, Lincoln, Marion, Pearl River, Perry, Pike, Rankin, Simpson, Smith, Stone, Walthall, Warren, Wayne, and Wilkinson Counties, of-Brunswick; Carteret. Columbus New"Hanove,,,_.0_-11, Counties of Beaufort, Berkeley, Charleston, Colleton, Dorchester, Georgetown, and Hony rtS,., nixc hf Anderson: Angelina;•Aransas;'Atascosa Austin; Bastro `Bee, eexar,+,Braioria;i8rooks,'Burleson;x!I Caldwell; Calhou'n', Cameron; Camp; Cass;'Chambers;, ero ee, o or , ,--, - 1 Fayette; Fort Bend; Franklin, Freestone; Frio; Galveston; Goliad;'Goniales; Gregg, Griines;.Giiadalupt3}Hgrdie nHamsiHamson;;Hays;`Henderson; Hidalgo; Hopkins,; Houston;; Jackson;;Jasper; Jefferson; Jim;Hogg; Jim`We Karnes; Kaufman; Kennedy, kinhey; kieberg; La Salle; Lavaca, -Lee; Leon, Liberty; Limestone, Live Oak; Mall Marion; Matagorda; Maverick•McMullen;Medina;=MilamMontgomery, Morris,:Nacogdoches, Navairo;'Newtoi Nuedes; Orange; Panola,-Polk; Rains; Refugid,:Robertson,.Rusk;°Sabine, San Augustine; San, acinto; San,P• cio, Shelby,: Smith;,Starr `itus,.Travis!:Trinity; Tyler; Upshdr sUvalde; Val Verde; Van Zandt; Victoria,. WaYker,; Waller; Washington; Webb; Wharton; Willacy; Williamson;Wilson; Wood, Zapata;"and Za"vala „ ;; %.=.:! ...,; e STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF LOAD ZONE From Table 3, identify the Roof Load Zone for the home. Verify that the home con- forms to the following rules. No home may be placed in an area with a higher roof load than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for the South (20 psf) Roof Load Zone cannot be placed in the Middle (30 psf) Roof Load Zone). A home may be located in an area with a lower roof load than that indicated on the data plate. (Example: a home designed for the Middle (30 psf) Roof Load Zone may be placed in the South (20 psf) Roof Load Zone). There are special high roof load areas (primarily in mountains) not shown on the map. Contact the LAHJ or SAA for information about these areas. The home' s data plate will indicate if the home has been designed for one of these high roof load areas. Ramadas may be used in areas with roof live loads greater than 40 psf. Ramadas are to be self-supporting, except that any connection to the home must be for weatherproofing only. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Conforms to HUD MHCSS I/WU9 TABLE 3. ROOF LOADS BY LOCALITY AM All counties All courities?:y`,tt"q v'x `,'"` All counties CourSties'of'Bueria Vista; 8liller; Calhoun `Cerro,Gordo CHerokee C,hickasdw;_Clay;'Dickinso6 Eririli loydMi.." yF.ranliliri;-Hamilton; Hancock; Hardin'lioward; Humbold_t;'fda',;Kossutf ', L'ydnn" NMitEi ell; O'Brien"O,i66ola;•;Palo Ad }I?lyinoutli`Pocahontas'; Sac; Sioux; Webster, UVinneba o, UVoith;lNri "'h s••,- 9h f.:•'"!i"a : r`L": c; ; i _ri ee , nt• p Counties of Androscoggin, Cumberland, Franklin, Kanabec, Lincoln, Oxford, Sagadahoc, York COUn Of ::t` Essex y}';, ;+r LT' --i"'• ` ''>`P":-;.. k.:. "-'-; rrt::: •-••-^: r>"-.-u—,-- tr- a'.'.'_3t%;{,_',::_._.:..ix.:i__.2;:ti:,.:i".•;ic;t4!:'t.`::•:IK'C.:»:i: Counties of Alger, Alcona, Alpena, Antrim, Baraga, Benzie, Charlevoix, Cheboygan, Chippewa, Crawford, Delta, Dickson, Emmet, Gogebic, Grand Traverse, Houghton, Iron, Kalkaska, Keweenaw, Leelanau, Luce, Mackinac, Marquette, Menominee, Missaukee, Montmorency, Ogemaw, Ontonagon, Oscoda, Otsego, Presque Isle, Ros- common, Schoolcraft, Wexford Counties of,Aitkiri'`Arioka Bentnn Rliio F %7ri..: :+::..,. + :'-,.,,.r^,,,,.- • ._.. ~-+s~r'r- Mr r. _ •hx-.,,r..... c vuoui ee er, Morrison;'Millie'Lacs; Mower, IVlartin, Murray,, Nicollet;.Nobless`Olmsted; Pipestikedw& ' Re"nville' Rice;,'Rock; St Louis;"Sibley; Scott; Steele;°Sherburne; Swift;steam dena; Wright; Washington,'Wabasha;:Winona;:Waseca, W1 on'wan, Yellow Medicine ?ru All Counties 4;- 'Y^' a.•.u;4.: ...7: i:a x„ •yid'_ '' .c•-;, ..r...,,.rtt;-:r"" Counties of Cayuga, Clinton, Essex, Erie, Franklin, Fulton, Genesee, Hamilton, Herkimer, Jefferson, Lewis, Livingston, Madison, Monroe, Montgomery, Niagara, Oneida, Onondaga, Ontario, Orleans, Oswego, St. Lawrence, Saratoga, Schenectady, Seneca, Warren, Washington, Wayne, Wyoming, Yates Counties of _Brookings; 'Glay;.Codingof n -0euel `Grant .Hamlin; Hanson; Hutchinson; Kingsbury''LikeLincoln; l:? µMcCook,;Miner; MinneHaha; Moo " ^ r t.> dy,.Turner,,Union,,) an ee•._X j zi All Counties .. _ k:iaii'.5t..:1 Courties of-A88ison; Caledonia; Chittenden, Essez;'Franklin Grarid;Isle, Lamoiile;.Orange, Orleans; Rutland ..— WasFiingtoriSWindso y,""r:: "•y; :A,_.{A x:r s.Jf:.,:., .,.. t tr:•:s:: <<r-- :.et,t%- ;• i•r, - , i.-s.:_ _u t„::.1:psi-.::-aa:..i:::4y:,...'.•c xia,,'::cc'.;'';.;;i S:,ri::.i%%;.».' Counties of Ashland, Bayfield, Barron, Buffalo, Burnett, Clark, Chippewa, Door, Douglas, Dunn, Eau Claire, Flor- ence, Forest, Iron, Jackson, Langlade, Lincoln, Marathon, Marinette, Menominee, Oconto, Oneida, Pepin, Pierce, Polk, Price, Rusk, St. Croix, Sawyer, Taylor, Trempealeau, Vilas, Washbum AII Counties,--_v ^"r ': { :T'r, .r,•.5 '...-lq,:.;i;..ru_-,.,,..>...K: :...r.r••r:,.-...., .•„ •• •. Cr..+e•e:. - . o:?., ry r ` e . lL _ 7. ic %` r iv .r.:e. ' , 'n° t5. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 Cn r z m n O O D O z z Cn D r r D I O z D z c D r 11 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. LE J a Z a Z O a J J Q H fn Z_ Z O F- Q O a O U W Z J Y fn 12 STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS Local regulations may set conditions for the siting and installation of a manufactured home. Consult the LAHJ, state manufactured housing association, and the state SAA See Resources, p. 4) for the specific local requirements, including: Building codes that may affect the construction of site built structures and in- frastructure. Local requirements regulating the installation of manufactured homes. Setback requirements for property lines, streets, yards, and courts. Fire separation distances. Development covenants for the specific property. The locations of flood hazard areas and any special foundation requirements for homes installed in those areas. In some areas, building permits are required to install manufactured homes. Prior to making any alteration to the site and the home, contact the LAHJ to determine if plan approval and permits are required. Conforms to HUD MHCSS Areas subject to flooding. The foundation specifica- tions contained in this manual are NOT intended to address flood loads. If the home is in the flood plain, consult a registered anninePr_ PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Prepare the Site IiUD MHCSS 1/15109 A properly prepared site is critical to a good quality installation and the long term structural stability of the home. This chapter explains the process of planning the site, evaluating the soil, and preparing the site for construction of thehome's support system. 1tY 1.: PL'AN SIT&ACCESS . ,13 • {;Y q, ,,,' .,:fir a:•,; k;r41,' i 1 ?__?N_ p.._ .it; c _ All -'sN . ,''!S,'YL'_ 7 r- •., — t, i , , ,tfl'l k.'-, ti, a: v y _ (+" y' i%'' " = _ W;;STEP 2r "DETERMINE -HOME L'OCATION.AND LAYOUT (p:' 13 jt.' ' " _' i ; ; '' '. t• w t"' >`,,' ;; '%j' ` It'i{p'i•.-' P.,"- }_.:: - ''as, .` .,.'.' f - f-,: t dki . STEP'3'CLEAR. ." AND GRADE THE SITE f .k{ 9 L '; t%"s S; .n.. z`.1j _ Win. 1 4'- `r ; i, "fi`','-v _ 'j,a7 i d,: :;,u .li, , — STEP,* DETERMINE SOIa ?,.:::•` t t>' ,. ' ;:.. , , ;;:,_,F, G `CONDITIONS'(P. 141; , ,: ;t•..',J t"' ,.. _.,, ti prpi .ilr r7 _ ' ! 1'r -•1}. - •`..: ', _;'aF f L.. n.,:n Mh .`' ,.fiSilin ,t - r1,,,{4-Yet,_ __ ,-', t ', ', ! r• `f:_ v J; a' _ip.`7{4 .rt rJ iht. ,i2.7 : J. ` ...F ;- 4i:'. I .•. P , t...,,_„- ,r.;, •''>,,_:.,';:., ,. {i=.. h.TrA, DETERMINEBEARING'CAPACITY AND r,':i•, `C'. r' !, ';ci :.' 1 ,:, ,. FROST LINE SOILQ; iSTEP,6: DETERMINE ^ I' ',;,t ' :`' . ^r • ; . 3- '`` . ; '_• r, i, e GROUND ANCHOR`H E . OLDING CAPACITY =' STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS Planning the route to the site is typically the responsibility of the retailer or transporta- tion company. Whoever is responsible must secure state permits from the states throughwhichthehomewillpass. In planning the route, avoid obstructions that might interfere with the passage of the home, such as low hanging wires and trees, low overpasses, and bridges not suitable fortheload. Contact the utility company if wires need to be moved. Do not allow branches, bushes, or other foliage to scrape against the home as the home is moved to the site. Avoid ditches, berms, steep slopes, and soft ground. Identify and fill any holes andsoftspotsintowhichthetransporter's wheels may sink. Avoid moving over steep changesingrade (20 degrees or more). If required, provide for home storage and staging areas on the site. Plan the delivery andstagingofhomesectionsandmaterialssothatafteralldeliveriesarecomplete, home sections and materials can be accessed for use and installed in the appropriate sequence. Orient home sections so they do not have to be rotated or excessively ma- neuveredduringtheinstallationprocess. Plan for temporary needs, such as dump- sters, portable toilets, crew parking, delivery vehicle drop-offs and concrete mixer de- liveries. Before moving the manufactured home to the site, inform the LAHJ and make sure the siteispreparedandutilitiesareavailable. STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT The home location may have already been determined by others. If not, plan the home locationandlayoutincompliancewiththeregulationsresearchedinGettingStarted, STEPS. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS (p. 8). Contact utilities for locations of existing infrastructure, such as underground cables, pipes, and electrical lines. When planning the site improvements, consider the following: The home location should be level. a Avoid contact with large trees, steep slopes, poorly drained areas, and poten- tialfloodzones. Preserve trees and shrubs for shade, visual screens, and windbreaks. Plan the driveway, parking areas, septic, well, other structures, and utility lines. AIM Skyline Corporation (4-48 1) Site Preparation. The home manufacturer has no con- trol over the site planning and installation of the home unless the manufacturer is responsible for the home's installation. Final responsi- bility for site preparation, including soil stability and frost heave control, lies with the installer. An improperly prepared site may result in the denial of a foundation - related warranty claim. Fire separation. Comply with any LAHJ fire separa- tion requirements or the re- quirements NFPA 501A, 2003 edition (Chapter 6). 13 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q z Q z 2 OIt— Q J J FQ- rn z z O Q O a w O U w z J Y rn Consider future additions, such as screen rooms, porches, and awnings. Site the home away from natural water paths. STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE Trim overhanging foliage considering future growth, potential storms, swaying in windandsnow/ice-weighted branches. Remove organic material such as vegetation, wood, roots, twigs, dead branches, grass, and brush from directly under the home. Remove any debris that could become termite infested from the site and surrounding area. Re- move all other debris from the home location, including roots from beneath footing loca- tions. Properly dispose of all items. Crown the site (Figure 4) away from the foundation for the first ten feet with a minimum slope of 1/2 inch per foot. Where property lines, walls, slopes, or other physical condi- tions prohibit this slope, provide the site with drains, swales, or grading to drain water away from the structure. Any fill required to grade the site should be inorganic "con- trolled fill" applied in a maximum of four inch layers, compacted between each layer to at least 90% of its maximum relative density. Direct runoff away from the site using ditches and berms (Figure 5). If the home will have skirting, start grading from two feet in from the edge of the home. L/ y VL/ Hc ise L/ y y yyyy y y Arrows Indicate dtechon of water flow. Grade the ground so that water under porches, decks, and recessed entries flowsawayfromthehome. If proper grading is not possible, use other methods such as adraintileandautomaticsumppumpsystemtoremoveanywaterthatmaycollectun- der the home. The home is suitable for the installation of gutters and downspouts. When gutters and downspouts are installed, direct runoff away from the home. STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITIONS Examine the soil type under the proposed home location to make sure it is suitable for placement of a home. The design of the home's support system, including footing/pierspacingandsize, will in part be determined by the bearing capacity of the soil, and if ground anchors are used, by the soil's withdrawal strength. The soil under every portion of the support system must meet the following criteria: The soil must be firm and undisturbed (not previously excavated) or fill com- pacted to at least 90% of its maximum relative density. Uncompacted fill will settle over time, causing the home to shift and become unlevel. Fill must not contain large debris. This too will settle over time. The soil must not be comprised of organic clays or peat. Organic material can decay, causing settlement, and also may harbor pests that can infest the home. Skyline Corporation 14 HUD MHCSS 1/15109 Site drainage. Moisture un- der the home can result in structural damage to the floor system and other parts of the home. Failure to provide adequate slope/drainage can result in moisture -related problems such as mold, mildew, and erosion. Figure 4. Crown the soil un- der the home to prevent wa- ter ponding Figure 5. Direct runoff away from the home Pr Soil. Inadequate soil bearing capacity or a support sys- tem mismatched to the soil characteristics can result in excessive or differential settlement of the home, which can cause the home to go out of level, resulting in jammed doors and win- dows, cracks in finishes and ruptured plumbing connections. 0 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. f — — — The water table must be below the lowest level of the planned support sys- tem/foundation. A soil's bearing capacity can be greatly reduced when it is saturated with water. Note that water tables may vary with seasonal or cli- mactic conditions. Consult a geologist or the LAHJ if you are unsure of the water table level. The soil must not be a highly expansive type. Expansive soils can expand when they become saturated with water, causing the home to shift and be- come unlevel. If soils are expansive, contact a registered engineer, or regis- tered architect to assist with the design of the foundation system. STEP S. DETERMINE SOIL -BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE The soil under a home must be capable of withstanding the loads imposed by theweightofthehome, its support system and furnishings, as well as any loads imposedbywind, snow, or other climactic conditions. SOIL -BEARING CAPACITY Determine the soil -bearing capacity in pounds per square foot (psf) before designing asupportsystem. The higher the capacity (psf), the more weight the soil can hold without unduly compressing. As the soil -bearing capacity increases, footings can be reduced in size or spaced farther apart. Use one or more of the following methods to determine the site's soil bearing capacity: Test the soil. Hire a registered geologist, registered engineer, or registered architect to determine the soil classification and maximum allowable soil bear- ing capacity by testing the soil in accordance with generally accepted engi- neering practice. Obtain soil records. The local office of the U.S. Department of Agriculture's Natural Resources Conservation Service (www.soils.usda.ciov) and/or the LAHJ may have test results and/or soil analyses on file for the area. Conduct a pocket penetrometer test. Use a pocket penetrometer to esti- mate allowable soil -bearing capacity as follows: 1. Select a location that will be under a footing. 2. Clear an area of a minimum of one square foot at least four inches deeportothedepthofthebottomoftheplannedfooting. 3. Using the instructions provided with the pocket penetrometer, take at least five readings. 4. Discard the high and low readings and average the remaining readings. Round this result down to the nearest soil -bearing value shown in the right column of Table 4. 5. Confirm that the rounded result matches the soil description on Table 4. Determine soil -bearing value by visual examination. If one of the options above is not available, the values on Table 4 can be used to establish soil - bearing capacity by visual examination. This method provides lower capacity values than the options above. Accurate soil identification typically requires special training or expertise. An engineer or building code official may be abletoassistinclassifyingthesoilfoundonthesite. 9:22 e Corporation (4-48 1) V9CoDnIo5rm,Fw" a00 to HUCSS 1/ 15/09 Z Soil bearing capacity. Sup- port systems on soils with bearing capacities less than 1, 000 psf must be designed by a registered engineer or registered architect and approved by the LAHJ. Limitations of pocket pene- trometers. Pocket pene- trometers do not work on sand or gravel. Use Table 4 to determine allowable pressure for these types of soils. If you encounter a layer of gravel, test the soil under the gravel. Do not put the penetrometer on stones larger than its tip as this will provide an inaccu- rate reading. 15 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O 1= Q J J Q H U) Z_ Z O Q tY O a O U w Z J Y 16 TABLE 4. SOIL -BEARING CAPACITY BY SOIL TYPE Sandy gravel and gravel; very dense and/or cemented sands; 2,000 course gravel/cobbles; preloaded silts, clays and coral (class 2) Clay, sandy clay, silty clay, clayey silt (classes 4A and 4B) 1,000 Professiorial;testingrelJncompa-ted•'fill!peat; organic clays;(clas's 5) +:; ;'S°. fi; ; .. Note to table: No allowances made for overburden pressure, embedment depth, water table height, or settlement problems. Use default capacity. Use an allowable pressure of 1,500 psf, unless site - specific information requires the use of lower values based on soil classifica- tion and type according to Table 4. Note that soil types may vary across a home site. In this case, the soil with the lowest bearing capacity should be assumed when designing the support system. Keep a re- cord of the soil -bearing capacity value; it will be used later to design the home's sup- port system. FROST LINE In climates subject to ground freezing, consult the LAHJ, a registered engineer, or reg- istered architect to determine the depth of the frost line. Figure 6 may be used as a guideline when there is no specific local determination. Keep a record of the frost depth; it will be used later to design the home's support system. 3' 0' STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPAC- ITY When using auger -type ground anchors to tie down the home, first, use a torque probe to determine the anchor -holding strength of the soil on the site. Use a torque probe with a shaft of sufficient length to test the soil at the depth of the Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 6. Average frost penetration depth (in feet) Torque Probe. Before using the torque probe, check with the utility companies for the location of under- ground cables or pipes to avoid contact with the probe shaft. 9:22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. anchor helical plate. Augur the probe into the ground, and following the probe manufac- turer's instructions, take the torque wrench reading in the area where the anchors will be installed and at the depth of the anchor helix. If the soil varies in consistency acrossthesite, then use the lowest reading. Based on this reading, consult the anchor manu- facturer's charts to select the anchor type(s). V9HUD#° 5 nforms to MHCSS 1/15/09 n r z m 0 O O 1 O z Z f D r r D O z D z c D r 17 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O H Q J J Q Z_ Z O Q O a IX O U w Z J Y CO) 18 Install Footings r Conforms to 1/15/09 This chapter provides instructions for the design and construction of individual footings that transfer the load from a single pier to the ground. A footing and pier together (discussed in Set the Home) is referred to as a "support." A footing mayalsobedesignedtocarrytheloadofmultiplepiers (often called "strip" footings). The design of strip footings is not cov- ered in this manual. 1 y ' d ?.: { 4.; j.; -• t ` ,t, ' illr 'ii `t x%'.- ; u`!F ;. fl " ' u _'r `i"1 + kry•f _ . t i r; al .,• ' if' L+.L' l - I r- iC"j- 1.''"r- i. vr'' STEPz1:•DESIGN_POINT(L'OAD SUPPORTS (P.18) E.• f r,` •, e r ysF;"i .i i V :`{L` c' qi t r .. `,. :lJ ,+Y i ^ ` ',t'•: S^ ur- IY t+LbM' , ' ' ll TiiiSz'Tlr'371._ = ,' • ^^'+:,,,s'I•t:..;=a ''i;' •r..-i'^ .':"."`'r J..'. v.., 8' STEP 2 DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS.(Homes,Without Perimeter Blocking) (p. 21) J''r l:sj"-`'. _ ' 11; .., ;`.hF"; c.n`' •y i T"6. .' r +- ' J": •"- _ t_.`1:r"'i7, J:r,' r. • ,' n ',. .! .. rl .rN `-•,y 7 •. Ih r": ''.M .- 1 i;_t;, STEP•3: DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS (Homes With Penmeter;Blockirig) (p.22)1 L .. _ Ira r p.a;,1 'n4_,• k;ll' 'gr.!A1+1 rt.+i , ;tF j •} }l, `• ',f'-., e .,,'' W1.1 r Q ,STEP:4 SELECT FOOTING MATERIALS L fltl 'r• rr' tr 1 irr r l; . f ), 1 ^ , ;Si?,;, 23)'' '; ii It i°.• i 1; ."7L ¢ '.w1 ? j ' i' t l . l ` i F 3,y.: i .l„ ,r( - 1"_ rt -(. `t„ ', r il,,;li , ;l• _ -: i- . 1,•1 . r:..i^ tii'i..la''r'. `ilr.r:t+1';,r' 23V ? STEP'S SIZE FOOTINGS (p:, ), : . , ;•'`,.'' , - sr 'a. C ly i S'.;irif,• c :F::r 7:Tr1f rl'•;TM •i"it: l•-f i •r••f. :. . ^Fi 1 •,i "F li 'T''k?'41 4. . -... 4 i j': tiYtif iti :.,, :! .., •?I r. - .. a rr 0 ' s•;= ,}z l;:r• t,•;'-fh:'•a, .. r°o .: C ul, .fit t' INSTALL FOOTINGS (p. 26)` _ ? '.. -`i 1,^ ' LL a' JY: r• . 'Y ' l.I7..' i,..:tii. _4• .'. k= ilzl ;- _ !k:"':— STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS All homes will need supports, and therefore footings, under the frame, marriage line for multi -section homes), exterior wall openings and other heavy point loads. The home manufacturer may have provided a blocking diagram (or tags, labels, paint High roof loads. For roof or other markings under the home) indicating the required locations and/or loads for loads of 40 psf or greater, perimeter, marriage line and/or frame supports specifically for this home. If so, the dia- a registered engineer or gram or tags take precedence over the directions provided in this manual. registered architect must determine the maximum Create a sketch of the home that includes the exterior walls, the frame I -beams and the marriage wall opening marriage line(s), if a multi -section home. The sketch will be used in this chapter to lo- permitted without pier or cate each support, and note the size of the corresponding footing. Figure 7 is an ex- other supports. ample of such a support plan. Door Piers Figure 7. Example of sup - Perimeter Blocking Piers I -Beam Frame Members port plan if required) \ / Frame Piers Wall Piers I -Beam Frame ( Frame Piers Post Piers . N Perimeter Blocking Piers Door Piers (if required) As the location and load for each support is determined, note it on the sketch. When selecting locations for supports, keep in mind that increasing the spacing between sup- ports will increase the load on that support and the size of the required footing. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. DETERMINE LOCATIONS Point loads exist where a bearing/structural weight is concentrated and transferred to the foundation at a specific point. Locate a support under each point load, including thefollowingexamples: Exterior doors on side walls at both sides of each door (blocking is not re- quired at exterior doors on non -bearing end walls). Other exterior wall openings four feet and greater at both sides of each open- ing (including multiple windows that total four feet wide or more without inter- mediate supports, even if individual windows are less than four feet). Marriage line openings four feet or greater at both sides of each opening. Locations where through -the -rim crossover ducts penetrate the rim joist at the marriage line and perimeter blocking is required (not required if the home is constructed with a perimeter frame system). Marriage line columns. Load -bearing porch posts. Under heavy (400 Ibs or greater) items, such as heavy furniture, waterbeds, fireplaces and large fish tanks. Mark the required point load support locations on the sketch. Supports are not required where the manufacturer has reinforced the floor (such as with additional outriggers or floor joists) and so noted in the documentation provided with the home. Figure 8 and Figure 9 identify typical point load support locations. Door Piers AM Corporation 1) Wall Piers PF#os Conlom(g,HUD M I/15/09 Figure 8. Typical point -load support locations 19 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. M 20 Door or opening less than W in width \ 0 Main Beam FooUng Footings sized for spans C Ej! Footings sized for 6 D respecbvely. (Noteif sized for Span D wan is less than 16" In Span C width, use combined span C+ D YAM a single pier) Column post or wall less than 16" In rndth FoobngM Footing P} Footing sized for sued for sized for Span B Span A+B Span A CALCULATE LOADS Use Table 5 to determine the loads on point -load supports. For each support, find the columns with the appropriate roof load zone and section width. Find the row(s) corre- sponding to the span (see Figure 9 for guidance on determining spans). The number in the columns under the "M" and "P" headings are the loads for supports along the marriage line and perimeter respectively (point loads in the center of a sec- tion, i.e. not along a marriage line or perimeter wall, require the load in the "P" column). Interpolation for openings between those shown in the table is permitted. Note the required loads next to each point load support on the sketch. on ( 4-48 PG. 1) to 1/ 15/09 Figure 9. Typical point -load support locations along the marriage line 1111111111111///",// S,( T. LE rQ, O•. PE19600312 STATE OF ' 4Q E Jeffrey T. Legault 4 2009.01.09 11: 26:23-05'00' PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. is to 1/15/09 STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Pe- rimeter Blocking) DETERMINE LOCATIONS All homes require regularly spaced supports along all main frame 1-beams. Select spacing between supports and sketch them on the support plan. Keep in mind thatframesupportsunderhomeswith8" deep 1-beams may be no more than eight feet apart. Those under homes with 10" or 12" deep 1-beams may be no more than 10 feet apart. Generally, greater distances between supports will require larger footings. Figure 10 shows typical frame support locations. ne Members ie Piers rriage Wall Piers e Piers Door Piers CALCULATE LOADS Use Table 6 to determine the loads on frame supports. Find the column with the ap- propriate roof load zone and section width. Find the row corresponding to the selected support spacing. The number in the intersecting cell is the load. Loads on all frame supports can be assumed to be equal if support spacing is equal. However, if different support spacings are used then each support with a different spacing should be calculated separately. Note the location and load required of each support on the sketch. TABLE 6. LOAD ON FRAME SUPPORTS FOR HOMES NOT REQUIRING PERIMETER B i ' vz Spacing frame supports. There must be a support located near the end of each I-beam such that there is no more than 12 inches of beam past the edge of the support. Figure 10. Typical support locations for homes not re- quiring regularly spaced pe- rimeter supports uuull l'urrr EY T. lv;Q GISTFj cc G A PE19600312 o STATE OF 5- 011 ONA; o Jeffrey T. Legaull r 2009.01.09 1126:11 - 05'00' LOCKING 3350 r".. x•.:-. xit t.32..,45_46"0. 0... 3. 2.. 9720 . r k:. i. 4. 3,. 300..0. 0.> 32..9w746,0 0. 43400300 >'` t"'"..zrc.. ?a:; :. 487.,,,.,,,,.,+.,,ria.#:r. z;;% R' 43,:30:r28;•00 i•;,_;.-i:; x..`;-.":—.'4383:75_007t"3" 379)"000v LZ46205130569051805760639057405063907090 fir: 6340y?, '7U' 7030:iit' 36400 `2a: ,>"w712 s r>3;?. ; ..... sr :• r `< a F: m.r e 79101;;S;t•'-' 8780i 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 21 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z a Z O Q J J Q rn Z_ Z O a fY O a O U W Z J Y Cn 22 STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS Homes With Perimeter Blocking) DETERMINE LOCATIONS Depending on design and location, some homes require regularly spaced perimeter supports along all of the sidewalls and marriage walls in addition to frame supports. This will be indicated on the data plate and/or documents included with the home. If required, perimeter supports are only needed on bearing walls. Bearing walls are those walls that support the ends of roof trusses or rafters (typically sidewalls and mar- riage walls but not end walls of main units or sidewalls of tag units). To minimize the number of required perimeter supports, space them evenly between point load supports as shown in Figure 11 and Figure 12 (but not under spans). These figures identify typical support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports. Door Piers Door or opening less than 48" In width Ridne Bearn Tff 7S.n Main 1-Beam nbers s Wall Piers rs Column post or wall less than IS" In width rs L', -s .—kweavea;'Rc Mania sex-•:.,..a.,..t,. I FooUnO Efti ESitibEi£ Foo6npMerria0ehne! FooUrps I Marriage Ifne( FooUn9 shed for supports sized for support sized for sized for Span C Span B Span A+B Span A CALCULATE LOADS Use Table 7 to determine the loads on frame and perimeter supports for homes requir- ing perimeter blocking. Find the column with the appropriate roof load (Table 3) andsectionwidth. Find the group of rows corresponding to the selected support spacing. The values in the intersecting cells are the loads for the frame, perimeter, and marriage line supports respectively. Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 90#0 po._ Worms to 1D MHCSS Ins/09 V&**WZIZA Spacing frame supports. There must be a support located near the end of each I-beam such that there is no more than 12 inches of beam past the edge of the support. Figure 11. Typical support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports Figure 12. Typical marriage line support locations for homes requiring perimeter supports 1l9/2009 9: PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Loads on supports of a given type (frame, perimeter, or marriage) can be assumed tobeequalifsupportspacingisequal. However, if different support spacings are usedtheneachsupportwithadifferentspacingshouldbecalculatedseparately. co" ZHOmsI Note the location and load required of each support on the sketch. HUD 12/16/09/09 TABLE 7. LOAD ON FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS FOR HOMES REQUIRING PERIMETER BLOCKING 1210 1360 1440 1210 1360 1440 1210 1360 1440 1850 9z.1970.,.`_:at:2200,t; ,a,2090t2290?1"9ra;2550 x.. _.......• 2460 2720 3110 2940 3270 3730 3410 3810 4350 11_. 8..9,.0,• i•c _.. =, .._ r.:_ _.:. . i2 0. 1,0 W200} 660s,, . 21502340 2630 2560 2810 3150 3000 3280 3680 v 3540r :: n 4510 ,- v» 4250:''...._,..::.,:- i:-, 5440 K+: 1y4960xs i r, 5570 vrl ' ; 6370 2110 2410 2580 R T 2110 2410 2580 2110 2410 2580 2760tl z!`..• 3020 • •i„c. :3400::i6¢•t 3310- k i_r3640 'S.;^4 ,., _-e: ..., , ;_ .-... ».r` giis' cx 4270 3 , c't, 4800+ 4620 51305910^ 5570 6230 7150 6520 7320 8390 4,j< x :2560, 294 R 31 r 2940' i 315 +;:•,"•, r I ,,r-^c. ma ..r„• „r,,.,.; 2560'`-M'. 2940',<. 31501 3370 36904180407044805050476052605930STEP4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIAL Select one of the products and materials from Table 8 for the footings. ABLE 8. FOOTING MATERIALS Minimum 6" thick poured -in -place concrete pads, slabs, or ribbons with at least a Poured concreteAllsoiltypesdaycompressivestrengthof3,000 psi. Cast -in -place concrete footings may also require reinforcing steel based on acceptable engineering practice, the design loads, and site specific soil conditions. Use in accordance with the pad manufacturer's instructions. Must be certified for ABS plasticStablesoilsuseinthesoilclassificationatthesite, listed and labeled for the required load ca- P...v .: , yyS7 J :•"`.1".t i . COr1SUit•Sc S -' ;r-.+--.N :;rr ?: :-;.a-4rr:; 1 e i;G&?- V-ce:-'--+•-•r— c esr •a-as-.r ropriety "stems;'- ..a-Y in'manlifac' ;.:,; •r;., .;. :.. -;1i•, `.,.::- `'' ; _. , -- e.•vC - a-,. u: 1 x+;%, t :i;;,ri .+1'sr x•: , CO SUIt S Stem manU(aCiUr S`..7N;r;'r '.. ,:_ :?r: •(s A: a^.:;1.,, r. r;'.=,I 1",+.<,:.u. a.ayrei'^tihd... tUrerr %__ y,;,. +-lrr:,.y • er. ,f, . r.ti`- .:s^ 3,. --a 3 ..y .•.•S•+• f .:i(-,3. u." _ u.-!.:,r.Mi c:i,.•.i'Jke•• ,sri."v.F:1x'v,i .....Xi .1i.Yr s: :: ;Fyi'•{•^ .{...:• •F:-:•I. .s s:. ,s2, aa`21 iTd:1x•.'''.•r'.,,L•::.',,•..4';?.,•,. -w.'Uzi#;i.:•i...•..in:;.n4.:z ri5i•}u.`a9ii Two layers of nominal 2-inch thick wood x 24" maximum length, pressure -treated Pressure -TreatedLum- with a water borne preservative, in accordance with AWPA Standard U1-04 for Use ber StablesoilsCategory46 ground contact applications. Cut ends of pressure treated lumber must be field treated in accordance with AWPA Standard M4-02. 12/15/ 20092:4 r-Ivi Skyline Corporation ( risrERFgGI; PE19600312 d STATE OF Q 2009.12. 15 14:46: 41 -05.001 rn A r z rn n O X V O D O z Z to i D r r D- t O z D z C r 23 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O P Q J J Q H Cn Z_ Z O 1= Q tY O IL tY O U W Z J Y to 24 STEP 5. SIZE FOOTINGS Once the load on the footing and the soil -bearing capacity are known, calculate the size of each footing as follows: 1. From Table 9 determine if the pier is to be of single -stack blocks (8 inch x16 inch) or double -stack blocks (16 inch x 16 inch) pier. 2. Locate the group of rows in Table 10 with the soil -bearing capacity deter- mined in Prepare the Site, STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL -BEARING CAPAC- ITY AND FROST LINE (p. 15). Use the next lowest value if the exact value does not appear. 3. Read across the table to determine the minimum required footing area and the minimum footing thickness for the corresponding footing type (single or double -stacked blocks). 4. The required footing size may be changed by selecting another support spac- ing (Table 6 or Table 7). TABLE 9. PIER CONFIGURATION 6ess,than'36 iri (except Single -stack blocks with lorigside 8;000 Ibs ''- piers:more ttian' 3 blocks;high) : perpendii:iilar, to 1-beam', ;? ''P' I' ' Between 36 in and 67 in and cor- Double, interlocked blocks 16,000 lbs. ner piers over 3 blocks high H _` .... cs v :Yc'sya:{c•r;--t:r+a;• •—uze'irri-,iE yS,: `':aN6 000 lbs. Ove67.in. ::i E Double; interlocked blok;..r. Single -stack blocks with long side 8,000 lbs. 54 in or less parallel to perimeter rail (rim joist) t; ;perpendicular to the rriarria ne Corporation ( 4-48 PG. Conforms to J HUD MHCSS 12/16/ 09 i /, Frost protection. When se- lecting footing materials, bear in mind the need for frost protection. Not all foot- ing materials are suitable for freezing climates. 07 PM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. TABLE 10. FOOTING DIMENSIONS 1115/09 256 16 x 16 4 512,r e„ 16 X'3 i.+ iSi:iM j• ' :•rr z n.:::::n: •i•:, iM ,._.....- ,1600' .,. '4 324 ,':;' r :::':c: sp• ....... 18 x 18 ';r:,- t• 1• 6'0.:0c.s ;;:^q t(::t:m ri, i i 4 1010 q ati t .400.- k -1010 20. , t.;1.:,.-. ^.xr ,. . dH; 1250• •; ... 4;:ii 9..:, a:. 1250r 576 24 x 24 a . „_• 1,' :_.. _..• __ _, .: :,,,c 900 i'er'. .t;i .- 4 1800r 4 - - 1800 i;_' 30'x 3 4. ieY t r2810 • ... 'f;M1.,• 4 °iF:a ='i x......•: r :3iri 256 16 x 16 `'` ;ia::'. ~ i:•'- .2810':1 rr ram_•_ +r* rar:-rx. • - rv:., 4 1680 4:.1680 5 ;. . o •» "•--, yr •` i^, x -Fr r.,c, , m T.'r. ; az._<.,i• .....« _ ;.16X32 .,afw;t:'i .iry' •4 •i;x;:<r;t. r, c,.s': s`f S':;"':i: <• 3370 ' s t: c ; 324 ., s.. .. . i ,.... `r;..i4%. .y. ,3370,i•a.::,:s 18x18 4 r. S:.... air•,, r ,. .._... :,a . . , 2130 4 2130 tt c"400; 't:7:iYi r.*20x20 :;a c.sfi'~. e< _: i'"U ...:;pia 576 24 x 24 4 3800 4 3800 256 16 x 16 4 2570 4 2570 71- x•,• ,`+% 515 0'. 324 18 x 18 r.< . 4 3260 4 400 ''', , _' 20x20; 4, ,Y::}_j - wt4020 s: ^, ::r:; .. i .... 4020 3260 576 24 x 24 Ei: _. i>• .. i.5ce....•. ,..........._----....... r :.. ,-,.• •- a.' 44 05800 900 ' :: r•' c ::30 x•30E' .: ii' i' ° :,n ,-,...:•. -. r- r:, .x -,.- t "'SOOQ;'3 eY,F,• -t:` "Fr`z-, o-c' 256 16 x 16 ri; :; q:r-.. Ss',R:. :- ,.910'.: q 3460 4 3460 r; „ _ 1 ;Litix iski i 16k_32r:,-iEirrlr 7.' r Y:;f, .. y _. .y,,, r 6.--y;,• f , f •k-"Y'i ` 324 •. _.-..,:.. Er:- _..:_ u:_...:.::::.::•.__ ,.•,c.'r•i;;;S:.::-_,;36840'i'. is ^ r-r.• r 4380 4 4380 f•400•c''C.,. i%! "7t-'-'`-"?'%:r:F:• ?'-t• irir^;r7.M.«:snr:r r-'r sr-..-, i:v L 'a;`:f:' s:'20X•20. ....Is ":+•::•'4,f•' s"' .:s." r• ..: 3: ?x-3nrx r- c:•. .:i3u, •. , s;..ir..:.,..._. :..• .,. >,.. 5410`: _ ,t4 576 24x24 •a:: : i.ri:r.,..:.• .w;`%:. .,.... ::, m..•..i•:::;c:.:,;...,.•t..:.•:..'i ;i3;,t's5410r' 7700 ra. m.,. ,,«... 6 n. ! 6 7700 0 goo.. 00x3 :ci; 17 • -:7— - "T. r •7'tt" . • y.r „w • ,,.,, i - - 0.. ra .. _.--R.' 56 16 x 16 c:r•- --.-...; r;. 4 4350 4 4350 Vic; ix:;16X32 :6 ! G:.., .••.. :c5 , c_ it '8620 '•• 324 18 x 18 4 ;'' ...>..., 5510 4 5510 t•' ° 400 %: f :ie t20x,20;f' :'' ;pxr•,_r .'. .:it:, .c.i' r, v.-,rr,r ra rv... -.. a;:rx;.. - x.? a;ia.-..isz:H. ._ _,........ <....... 4..%6.,, r . Ix. , • 6t300. r:.;< <,r: r:,3?i 4 :•: ',!o.,.,,-1,.. 576 24 x 24 d.':•• -'--- ::,:.,:.^.;tc r:., :.,• ..., .<. . ........:..:Y,.,. 8000 6 9700 f^^.j: 1:.i1Tri9 O f`'- ! .,•. :'rl'i _ "T[::.. .., rir., •,1-,+" .i7Y" •Tvvr ...,.rv.n _ 256w 16 - : ,: e i: ''' i+.•i: ;8',_::.?•.,• .15000:•: _ x 16, 4. : .. .. ' .r. ...... S. C.c%c•:i:i:,._ i F z r. r r_ w s... r: • 5240 4 5240 1" ''I; ' it,i 16 X32e'•'k .`4..`- .s . l.,,+ t:'......' F"-.!;".T.iy-',„r, t(-•.-rlln-r-r,r • ]i ' "•]a, 4i,rGrLM-, 4S .f.ruu••.K• w•.,.rn,:h,>•1'•,:.._...4. e__•ii+4 e•, s..\,.: SN,',RY::aY3a_..y- .VfiMwYiii A•c..,iYfz..• i. F•+'.[,..3eY.A, 0400" b':•.;x. :a.' 1Li`} SOOOi 32418 x 18 4 6630 4 6630 400 .20' X_20. .1,r.: ,FkT •1i:R?q'?k'»,5'!: :.{',: c; .r8000' .:,{;.'4 x, ...rf-n . z' e. . -ear, ,-._• rlr,':.i.: m::s:::....,..,.,_xL.>:§i!:2:Ya_.,__.. .aa._...:.ii::, ':4Y"`•' yi,,,:r:i.•:,;7yc•8190•g.=Y,s''i'•.` 576 24x246en„ ,, 8000 6 00 77:•'t'•+'-.r:".',":.,.W :d"_isf.!w':'tR:-<r..,::C'"!1.!•.n-.+:6'wn4lti.s-n...-r.•.-.x....- ------- 117 Note: The capacity values listed have been reduced by the dead load of the concrete footing? Design footings to comply with the following additional requirements: Design each footing at least slightly larger than the base of the pier it sup- ports. Tokeep footings directly under 1-beams and other support points, size them slightly larger than the minimum required area to allow slight adjustment of the pier location during home installation. Design footings with a footing extension (projection beyond the base of the 1 /9/ 2009 9 Skyline 4-48 PG. 1) III P, vY T. G1ST P PE19600312 O STATE OF ¢ a iryss/ONALS' 0' %%%` V 2009. 01. 021125:36 05W 25 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O Q JJ Ea- rn Z Z O H a O o. O U W Z J Y n 0 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 12/16/09 Figure 13. Maximum foot- ing extensions 16' Block 4' a 1' 4TTyp 24- NO 16• 16' YESFootingts ss NO Than ItsTnx kness 24 16 OrLess YES i 4' 8' 4• 4• Split Footing Extends Spin Footing Extends YES Less Than One mtid N O More Than One Third ttswidth ttswidth The footing sizes shown are for square pads and are based on the surface area 11111 11 rf square inches). Design non -square footings such that the area and depth is depth the square footing shown in 6Y T. L/' equal to or greater than the area and of from the edge of the pier to the edge of the footing is P ER,OTable10, and the distance not more than the thickness of the footing. r PE19600312 For four -inch thick unreinforced precast concrete footings, use the minimum footing size for the six-inch cast -in -place footing from Table 10. STATE OF TABLE 10A. FOOTING EQUIVALENTS 9Oc-'.///DIAN?:'?. Round Cast-in-.,Unreinforced C`S,S,ONA' Cast -in Place 16 x 16 Pre -Cast Place Conc rete 2xl 2x24 Treated t NC-; Concrete Concrete Pads (Diameter — Lumber Pads Inches) Jeff Legault inches) 2009.12.08 16 x 16 Single 20 Single r.,.,-.,.a.-,,,. g 14:48:21-05'00' 24 x 24 Ouad 28 -. f_-- _....,__...,, Triple STEP 6. INSTALL FOOTINGS the footings as follows: Construct Maintain the distance between adjacent piers to within 10% of the tabulated spacing and so the average distance between any adjacent spans is equal to or Placing Concrete an - chors. If anchors will belessthanthetabulatedspacing. Whenever possible, place point load supports directly under the required loca- placed in concrete, follow instructions in Install tions. If plumbing, electrical, mechanical equipment interferes, place supports than 6 inches in either direction of the support point. Stabilizing System (p. StaStano more to determine anchor Recess perimeter blocking supports and perimeter point load supports no more layout. Either place an- than 10 inches from the edge of the floor with added support as shown in chors immediately after Figure 14. the concrete has been poured or drill them in af- ter the concrete has set. S 1) PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. s to 12/16/09 4x4 Or2-2x4'S OnEdg Tooether) spanning Ml Fla it Rim Plate 1p• M From Ec If footings are rectangular, orient them so that the long side is perpendicular tothehome's I-beam. Place the bottom of footings on undisturbed soil or fill compacted to at least90% of its maximum relative density. In freezing climates protect footings from the effects of frost heave in accor- dance with any LAHJ requirements (see Prepare the Site, p. 13). Place the bottom of the footings below the frost line (insulated foundations and monolithic slabs are other frost protection options not covered in this manual). Make sure the top surface of the footing is level, flat, and smooth. In accordance with the American Concrete Institute publication ACI-308, maintain curingmeasuresbeforeconstructionorinstallationontotheconcretefootingbegins, until aminimumof70% of the specified 28-day compressive strength has been achieved. TheACIrecommendedtimetoattainthislevelofstrengthissevendaysforASTMC150 Type 1 mixtures and 10 days for Type II mixtures. Full design live and dead loads maynotbeapplieduntilthe28-day duration has elapsed for achieving full strength. 16' Sinole Pad mbg Load distributing pad 0093: Quad Pad Footina 16" x 16" Plywood Pad Footings or 16" x 16" x 4" Concrete Pad Footings Load distributing pad for support 24 it-1/a• Single Pad Footiria Triple Pad Footing 2" x 12" x 24" Lumber Pad Footings PM Skyline Double Pad Footina Double Pad Footing 1) Figure 14. Perimetersup- ports Excavation. If excavation is required, mark the footing locations on the ground with stakes before beginning to dig. Figure 14A. Footing pads. 111111111!/1/// EK T. LFC G1STEj PE19600312 O •' STATE OF :•Q O '•• P:' •tiDIAt... S/ONA I Jeff Legault f( 2009.12.15 15:20:06 - 05'00' 27 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. to 1/15/09 Construct Foundation FOR HOMES WITH LOAD -BEARING PERIMETER WALL) This chapter provides guidelines and recommendations for the design and construction of a basement or crawlspacefoundationusingaload -bearing perimeter wall. A load -bearing perimeter wall foundation system uses a wall along theouteredgeofthehometosupportthehome's outside walls. This perimeter support works with interior supports such as piers, columns, and cross beams that support the home's frame and, if multi -section, marriage line. J ti1t..r - :•fT.i :1-. Kl' - "{ -- i . : . ' i - lirLo : it ^•'•., .. '•>;^..i, . f,, `:'''.•i ak {; wtii: , - a { :. '' hl;• ,`43`. - 'Fi'i Yj'h-{: _.. ." _ „ = ;T- t . i'{ ` -ILA..,.: 1STEP'1.OBTAIWXFOUNDATION DESIGNfyCy ,, {,1 C it _ L,!!rl a,, - ,. i ,t..f Y (Ql4t ij "• Ke ,• IJ ` '7 Si _'. _ r•pr •. 'ni: tr;:)'.f•:(1r.f+. , :{+ : r'riPr i isj'" r Y _ ;. y.. .a a: ,`;: j'y,' - '~ .:tly. _ ,,.,'1}'_ i` ,`.• - T. I '' - .! I' ! ~ ice, ` 1 :A:, .1 1.••. 1 p' ,;r, STEP.2: EXCAVATE (p.'28)''- ,"r_ - :f;, `r%' ''j ;+.r•,.-qi.'', ; ., Ri' _ - . _`; , I _'. .. •,(f' .. — •' .iYr i•':. _.S •-F ' i. it jIn Fi):, 'J` ' _ — • '.••i 1'•Y',': , _ _ 4:i, i' STEP 3. CONSTRUCT. FOOTING SLAB (p: 28): v,-,'l'-u ic,;lc'ai.}tr'r'r. ' t"`'?.,- •?- t:c .}-+•3'i.. ,t'„ s . F_. A#{• f•` M a.' . T•. p }i y = a='I.. _j µ,, F ;1„ y ,,V _!STEP 4' C_ONS,TRUCT.THE"PERIMETER WALL 28 n r, "` : + ,, ' - r , = I., { J `_ • E. ,j R—:,, •iT;„<:•:}t ' ,a'H; = a-' ` t' •'iC„1`_:r . ,r', ,lt. ai+'' : rf i , f '';t+ i `- .:c fi" ,(,.., •r. ' ' _ ; . 7 t, 1-%i;{iSTEt?5rINSTALL'INTERIORSUPPORTS_(p.29)' 1 i L . r_ .- y.; it .> L"' i, '1+if=:{}'• ',.i, s 7+ i, r _ ; y`r`• l '{....•r '!' ,.,,.., •{ ':5h it";irtr• ,!_ + '^G4 ' t • Cprfi+r " F- r, i' ` ,++.",t,' 'R"•v_, : ' 'j'4, . ." F . . : 4: '''_.: i =.1.' s r l _. 1 ROOF F.• FOUNDATION if `.. U.- WALL, WALL,(p•29.)STEP;'6WATERPJ:{,.,-t; Lt41,'li ;;' =4°:: y7iiR' f *, ._.,.'FI. ; .-:,t;'. •, d':+' fr1.r. r ,h:. ..9:t-a'1„•._1:.- f w:. :r_ F;_` r I. '.?IF. ,.I: • *`:LF' ' r ' y' {. I ,: T l- j ;STEP 7.; BACKFILL AND GRADE 29 "_ 1• x,:ti _ -' IWIN STEP 1. OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN foundation design has not been provided by the home T /, i If a load -bearingperimeterwalloftheretailerand/or home owner to provide a de- manufacturer, it is theresponsibilitysignapprovedbyan engineer or architect, licensed in the state where the home will be installed. The approved design must comply with the LAHJ regulations for foundation Using engineered designs. This section is NOT in - design, waterproofing, and drainage, and the following: tended to provide a com- The foundation perimeter bearing wall must be supported with a concrete slab plete design for a buildable or continuous strip footing around the perimeter of the home. Interior piers must be supported by a slab or footings. If footings are used under interior foundation. A complete design must be obtained piers, they may be designed as in Prepare Footings, p. 18. that is suitable for the local Slabs must extend to the edges of the home. area and sealed by a pro- fessional engineer or regis- QFootings and slabs must be protected from the effects of frost heave by ex- the frost line or by using a frost protected tered architect, licensed in 4 tending the footings to or below the state. z shallow foundation design. Foundation ready home. Make sure that homes to z STEP 2. EXCAVATE be installed on a basement O Excavate for the foundation, properly disposing of the earth that is not needed for or a crawlspace have been Q backfill or site - grading purposes. ordered with a recessed frame or as foundation- a STEP 3. CONSTRUCT THE FOOTINGS OR SLAB ready, where the frame is designed to avoid interfer- F Construct the foundationaccordingtotheapproveddesign, including the perimeter ence with the foundation z foundation wall, drainage system, footing(s), and/or slab. wall. z Q STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL Checking the water table. For basements, check for a w Unless the approved design requires otherwise, construct the perimeter wall with mor- reinforced concrete blocks orreinforcedpoured -in -place concrete. Install re- high water table. The water table may vary seasonally O a O taredand inforcement according to the approved design or LAHJ. Install ventilation and access openings according to the approved design, or if not specified, according t(the or based on weather condi- tions. A geologist can per- t/ I quirements in Complete Under the Home, STEP 3 INSTALL SKIRTING (p. 97). form an algae test to de- w z When constructing pockets for an H-beam system, measure the beam depth and lo- that when the home's frame rests on top of the termine the water table level. The foundation de- YH-beam, cate the pockets carefully. It is critical the perimeter of the floor rests squarely on the foundation wall sill plate Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9.22 AM 28 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. to 1/15/09 Figure 15). Leave room for a two-inch nominal, pressure treated wood spacer on topofthewallpockets (to prevent corrosion, the steel beams must not be in direct contact with concrete). Leave at least one inch for thermal expansion at the ends of the beams and maintain a minimum of two inches of bearing area for the beams in the pockets yielding a minimum pocket depth of three inches). Bolt a pressure treated wood sill plate (minimum 2 x 6) to the top of the foundation wall. If the home's siding cannot be nailed through, use a 2 x 10 sill plate that extends into the foundation 1-1/4 inches (Figure 16). The home can then be connected to the foundation by fastening the sill plate into the floor joists from below. Connect the home to the foundation according to the approved design. Recess nuts into the sill plate andcutofftheendsofboltssotheydonotprojectabovethesillplateandinterferewiththe placement of the home. Floor Pressure ChassisCtuse Sill Plate Mern 1-Beam Transverse H•Deatn Pressure Treated Plate 4zBzlrwrJr Concrete Block STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS Install piers, columns and H-beams to support the interior of the home according to theapproveddesign. STEP 6. DAMP PROOF FOUNDATION WALL Damp proof the foundation wall no less than up to the height of the planned backfill. STEP 7. BACKFILL AND GRADE Backfill against the foundation wall to the height of the damp proofing.Take care to not damage the drainage system. Grade the fill as per Prepare the Site (p. 13). 9:22 Skyline 4-48 PG. sign must account for a high water table. Level the wall. Make sure the foundation is level and straight with no more than a 1/4 inch vertical variation over the entire foundation and no more than 1/8 inch vertical variation over any two -foot length. Check for Plates. When us- ing an H-beam system, check and compensate for reinforcement plates that add thickness to the chas- sis beam at axle locations. Figure 15. H-beam installa- tion Figure 16. Connection using 2 x 10 sill plate Limits of exca- vation. When a crane will be used, excavate no more than two feet outside the foundation perimeter. Un- excavated ground will pro- vide a more stable base for the crane. Footing heights. Pour foot- ings to a height that will re- duce the need to cut blocks or shim when building peri- meter walls and piers. Backfilling. Backfill against basement walls only after the home is connected to the foundation or the basement walls may deflect inward or collapse. 29 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Worms to ID M aa___ 1/15/09 Set the Home This chapter describes the process of installing the first section of the home (for single section homes this is the only sec- tion) onto the foundation. z`3tn wf '1,a ,,F ' w',r•w- V iSTEP,1: PREPARE FOR SET (p .30 STEP. 2 POSITION HOME•SECTIOI STEP 3. LIFT.HOME (p.130) f. a '• STEP'4: CONSTRUCT -PIERS (P. 32 14 3 t'-t';j. a fi ,fife+,Q}j ,}_' b , !Y,• .P, 1'` f 7xi;C •1r'Rr ft• , J„7r• - t1+; yY',. ii:z. a . M•, i• fj a 1,; ;r Ft; Ma. . y STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET Before beginning the home set, complete the following: V, I Confirm that the site is properly cleared and graded (see Prepare the Site, p. 13. Clearances under the Ensure that the footings are in place and properly located. home. After the home is leveled, the resulting dis- Install any utilities that will be difficult to install (e.g. those below grade be- tance between the bottom neath the home) after the home is in place. of the entire chassis main Secure or remove from the home and properly store all ship loose items (refer frame beam and the to shipping documents for items shipped with the home). ground must be no less Inspect the home interior, exterior and all provided materials, appliances, and than 12 inches. equipment. Immediately report any damage or shortages to the manufacturer. Utilize proper cribbing. The ground moisture retarder may be installed now or after the home is com- Manufactured homes weigh several tons. No plete. See Complete Exterior Work, STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOTS- one should be under the TURE RETARDER (p. 96) for requirement and then return here. home (whether it is mov- For perimeter bearing wall foundations: ing or stationary) unless proper cribbing is in place Check that the length and width of the home match with the foundation walls. Figure 17). Failure to util- Check that the two main diagonal measurements of the foundation are equal. ize proper cribbing may Check that the foundation walls and other support points are within 1/4 inch of result in serious injury or J Q level overall and within 1/8 inch of level within any four foot distance. death. Z For multi -section homes, check that each pair of diagonal measurements forzeachportionofthefoundationcorrespondingtoahomesectionareequal. For multi -section homes, find the electrical bonding lugs on the front or rear poutriggers. Reverse them to the inside of the outrigger using star washers so H they will be accessible after the home is placed on the foundation walls. JIf using an H-beam system, remove the frame's shackle hanger if it will inter- Leveling during jacking. Keep the home's Q fere with proper placement of the beam. floor as level as possibleH to z STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION during jacking. Twisting or warping the floor can dam- n Position the home section in its final location (if possible, move the heaviest section of age the structure and finish- 0 Q the home into place first). Then place materials needed to construct support piers near their final locations under the home as determined in Prepare Footings, (p. 18). ing. Use as many jacks as necessary to keep the floor Of flat and level. CL STEP 3. LIFT HOME 0 There are three primary methods available to place the home on the foundation: jack- L) ing, rolling and craning. Jacks, often with roller systems, are typically used for pier and W anchor foundations; roller systems are commonly used for crawlspace foundations with Z load -bearing perimeter walls; and cranes are most commonly used for basement foun- t dations. Y to Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 30 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. JACKS If jacks are to be used, comply with all jacking safety precautions and the procedurebelow. Lifting the home with jacks involves potential risks and must be done with ut- most care and caution. Failure to follow jacking warnings and procedures may result inseriousinjuryordeath. Please read the Jacking Safety Precautions before lifting thehomewithjacks. No one`should be urider`the•horrle's'I-beam '--h'1 s w i e• 11IC jdyrs.are oemg.oper- r..,. hom ,_•.. rated or while the a is supported only on''the jacks: ; `''`'i;=``' `.;`'r l '1 ', :•' f' r • ' _'••. '-c , ,: r' , • I •r.., . , - rz„, r., l .,. . , ': lF r".,r,.• ' iUseacksonlfry, or raising the home. Do rio_ t relyon the jacks`to support theft tlf* G_. , t` >- sA, ;.;;" ` t t_.y 'j" "ti`• = :` ' _i possible; raise :the homeonly on one side`so thafthe othbr side is incontact withahe ground. LeaJe'the hitch connected to the vehicle or;other•stabilizing i, equipment:''",_` - Obey all OSHA'regulations: •, j. `,:i `' , - _:: , ' ,_ ,F; Make.sure adequate safet ' +' ' ' '+''' '' y . home` adeq _ y cribbing•(Figu' 17) is in_,place wheneve"r,the -• ., is placed, on jacks. - i--r'.• - t. •. .+ ..,, . _,1 '!f'; : - ,'i1 ir..t•,t, k ; - `tom .1T} Use a minimum'of twr ocommercialualiacks,; with`a of at t12tons. -=•''' r " . aii ''. , a ' q ty j each rating least;:; u Jack only on the main chassis a 1-beam;,centering jcks directly under.the....-- t ;!.• i1, beam.x_ j ;_>.' ci;.: ". ,-: ii ..+ ,r •+i. - :q : `. :;. v; +.., : -FBI I. -+ rs f' T '. jDo; not ack'•- on, a sea rri,(joint betv!ieeri flanges;s, of twinti 1 +' I -beams):,:,,• To distribute the cdhcentr'ated loadsfrom'jacks to I-beam; place a minimum F•` 3/8-inch thick steel plate, `a C-channel;;a 1 %ririchthick' fiar'dwood blockor a • ` Tcommercial jacking plate; between the°main chassis I' beam a_nd'_th_ a jack h ad.- Locate thejackbaseon'frm round: Never.'disturbed` T• .rl.' 9 jack on freshly soil'or.- vI/herean,tlnder round -sewer pip d !`:,- , 9 emaybe'locate ri' i se a firm su ort under the ack base to' revent ti s^-•' UPP j .. , , P , , , Pp!n9 or,se{tling of tfie jack. r'•-„ ;.. } A` minimurn.l6" k 16" or larger wiood, or; rigid fiberglass p'ad isrecommended: Nev`er,u§ c ete eicon rblocksas a support for;a,jack' Follow the jacking sequence outlined below to avoid overstressing structural members: 1. Block wheels. Block the wheels so the house does not roll. 2. Install cribbing. Install safety cribbing (Figure 17). Level lengthwise. Locate one jack at the hitch and level the section length- wise (such that the front and rear of the section are at the same height). Locate frame jacks. Place a minimum of one jack just forward of the first spring hanger and another just behind the last spring hanger of the I-beam on the side of the home that is lowest (making sure not to place jacks where the piers will go). Place jacks no more than 20 feet apart and no more than 20 feet from each end of the I-beam. Lift the home. Operating the jacks simultaneously (or sequentially in very small increments), lift the home section until it is slightly higher than the final desired pier height. ROLLER SYSTEMS When using a roller system, comply with the equipment manufacturer's directions and the followingsequence: AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 1) Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/ 09 Figure 17. Stack 4"x 6" by 5' long timbers as shown to form safety timbers. Place safety timbers under home behind axle area and under hitch. rn r z rn n O X D O I O z Z ch D r r Dd O z D z C D r 31 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q D Z a Z O 1= Q J J a H Z Z O F- Q O a W O U W Z J Y N 32 1. Establish staging area. Establish a staging area directly adjacent to one or both sides of the foundation. 2. Setup rollers. Set up the roller system according to the equipment manufac- turer's directions. 3. Fasten bump blocks. Temporarily fasten wooden bump blocks on the sill plates at the ends of the foundation to stop the home from rolling at the de- sired location. 4. Roll home. Roll the home into place over the foundation. 5. Remove bump blocks. Remove the blocks before installing the next section of a multi -section home. CRANES When using a crane, follow these guidelines: Position the home section(s) and crane (taking the boom reach into consid- eration) such that they do not have to be repositioned during the set. Use enough properly sized straps to maintain balance of the home and to prevent damage to the structure. Place straps under walls or posts, including temporary posts used to support the opening. Do not position lifting straps under marriage wall openings. Use a properly sized spreader bar to maintain a vertical lift, to avoid placing compression forces on the eaves and to reduce any tendency to slip. Connect a rope to at least one point on the home so it can be controlled while aloft. Make provisions to retrieve the straps/cables after the home is set. If using a cradle system, notch the sill plate where the straps will fall. For a sling sys- tem, notch and reinforce the home's rim joist to keep the strap from slipping and allow the strap to be removed after the home is set. Always set the home section farthest from the crane first so that subsequent section(s) need not be lifted over previously set sections. STEP 4. CONSTRUCT PIERS For the side of the home section that is up on jacks, place piers on footings or pads fol- lowing the home manufacturer's blocking plan (or tags). If no plan was provided, use the support plan developed in Install Footings (p. 18). Start at one end of the home section and work toward the other noting the required pier material specifications and procedure described below. Construct piers so as to provide a stable foundation for the home using materials listed in the specifications box below and based on the location of the pier and its height as measured from the top of the footing or pad to the top of the cap. See Table 12 for pier construction requirements. rporation (4-48 PG. 1 PFS#os Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Designing piers. Incorrect size, location or spacing of piers may result in serious structural damage to the home. Install piers at all re- quired locations. Failure to do so may lead to sagging floors, walls, and roofs, and could void the home's war- ranty. 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. I Conforms to TABLE 11. PIER MATERIAL MIKHMIM 4ZO=f'1117119-A-rie%ke VW00,_1HUDMHCSS TABLE 12. PIER CONSTRUCTION Less th:an 36 in-e'x'c'e-p t Single-itiick bI66ki'wit ong6&h6il5ierim6re'_th'an3_..... h I NotIIT: - -7 YV 8,000 lbs:. side perpendicular tolzbbbm .;i,;4!J re"q-u'ired:' Frame Between 36 in and 67 in and comer piers over 3 Double, interlocked blocks 1" (V up to 36" blocks high high) 16,000 lbs. Not required diver 6 .,in red'engi e6i6 F6giDesigne Single -stack blocks with long114Perimeterinorless* side parallel to perimeter rail Y2high, " upto36" hi rim joist) 1 " over 36" high 8,000 lbs. Not required N . — 11 "1 , — 6- 1_::.- 1; - single-stackbIodkswith'I ng - or 54in' sJ.deper-p"en-dlc- 10/21,u to36".'hibh 8'000'16s ';-,..`Not liquAd ulartothe1, 6e;; H,; V narria 14Y Constructperimeterandmarriagelinepiersover54inchesaccordingtotherequirementsforframepiersofthesameheight. 1. Prepare footing surface. Make sure the footing surface upon which the pier sitsisflatandsmooth. Before placing the pier on the footing, clean dirt, rocks, or other material off the surface of the footing. For cast -in -place concrete foot- ings, if the footing surface is uneven, create a level, flat surface by placing a treatedboardonthefootingandmortaringonthefirstblock (or manufactured pier base), or by placing the first block (or manufactured pier base) on a layer ofpremixdrysandmortar. 2. Stack blocks. Stack concrete blocks with their hollow cells aligned vertically. Whenpiersareconstructedofblocksstackedside -by -side, orient each layer at right angles to the previous one (Figure 18) and plan blocks so that split caps will be perpendicular to the blocks they rest on and to the I-beam. Typical metal pier. 15 MOMteLem Where available piers do not ieve the required capacity, two r more plers may be used. The urn of the pier capacities shall n at least equal to the load ipecilied. e Corporation PG. Figure 17A. Multiple Piers. 33 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 0 J Q z Q z O Q JJ Q H rn z z O Q O a O U w z J Y V) 34 Man I -Beam Wood Shins to Ft Gaps 1p to 1'Max OptonalM Spear 4x6x16 Concrete Cep or 2xd116 P.T. or Foidmod Cap Typical 6x6x16 Concrete Block Typical Finarg Man FBeaM Wood Sims to FA Gaps Up to T Max Optional (2) 216 or 1) 202 Slower 4XBx16 CoMMW Cap Typical 6xK16 Concrete Block 0 II V Typical Footry Cap piers. Place a cap on hollow block piers to evenly distribute the structuralload. Use caps the same length and width as the piers they rest upon. When using split caps on double -stacked block piers, install the caps with the longdimensionperpendiculartothejointintheblocksbelowandtothemaink beam. Install shims. Use shims to level the home and fill any gaps between the base of the I-beam and the top of the pier cap. Always use shims in pairs Figure 19). Drive them in tightly so they do not occupy more than one inch of vertical space. When the space to be shimmed is greater than one inch and less than the minimum thickness of available caps or concrete blocks, use hardwood dimensional lumber (two inches maximum thickness) or 2" or 4" thick concrete block. For split caps, install shims and dimensional lum- ber/blocks over each individual cap. 5. Set up level. Set up a water level with the fluid level at the desired height of the main piers. Carefully lower the side of the section down onto the leveled piers, adjusting the final height with shims. t,F ., --- -'Z^•--bra. USINGAWATER-LEVEL,-,s-'--_ A water,level is a standard'dev(ce•fonleveling--•the hbrrie:-The level,z tVconsist§ Vthe following components:,,,J, :Vb 14', c9 , I,,... ,t;,ry•`5 -y: 's= .),,.r L:'"µ.:_4, i it,• ., t`I One container'(five,-gallon bucket or`one gallori'.jug).' L•: =..; '. ,. x,r-"•" , •:. rl; .•1 . i156feetoil/2'inch diameter,plastic tubing: Skyline 4-48 PG. 1) to 1/ 15/09 Figure 18. Frame pier con- struction Curing time of mortar. Where wet mortar is used to construct or level piers, al- low it to cure to at least 80% of strength capacity (usually requiring 96 hours) before setting the home. Figure 19. Correct shim placement Dimensions of masonry perimeter walls. If using a masonry perimeter enclosure, calculate pier heights so that the enclo- sure can be built using stan- dard unit dimensions (with- out cutting). Level the home. The home is adequately leveled if there is 9: 22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. rl s for C ner-to -t`,`,'._ F^ u*•z•c^ i, r--:a 1/15/09 Fittings ontai tubin t- r' ,Tr v':1Py5am'sefo' r ..t' n-al end ;of tu'binrg I'`.-;i Liquid'for'sysfem: co.lo•reldzwater in warm climates;windshield l washingfluid n cold climates c•r. •., I fl—.+ ...all .r....LL..,. ». vu,i... u.wN-•,.ti^V/..— .r rli•.•li•-'r:-.... I. IJiLrr, Y .r_rl: cw•rer cn,,•-r,-;ri. fc•y{. L.+ a. rrfv.;•. y,.. -i, a an •,-•-r..`.'-'*, How' - to use,,a water'level' ,'; r i• , r F'd`` ^ % yi ki ;-' r ! i Jt.i!!S .i 'i t;_ r'•`'`:,• '_ir I, :''' yt:P-,..•;: r,f; ri a:` `Position level. Positio:n.thelevelsuch.that it can reach all pier§: til- "PI ac`e"''container: Place theFcontaine so that the fluid in ttie con-,! tamer is at'the'same level as the desired'level of the top'of the 5: r supports under the home; allowing for: any bracing below the r ^'.level of the I -beams:" ` E:7 ; , ..., *.. r•a,rr's, , r' :: •.:'+" 'c{ v .`.tr;.,.. lJncoil,tubin9: Uncoil tF1e'fubing and fill with fluid; taking care no(' to introduce,6ubbles into the"hose: Never allow"anything to crimp' or -crush the`tubi as -toimedethI'- t ng•so p e free flow of•fluid:' f i; + d n; Bleed air. Hold - .'-'„ t+ t b <,•_.-;"o1 •,__ the'valve below the level ofthewatercontainer;: open, the valve to bleed out' any,air and close the•valve.- e , ,Estalilish;height.;L`ocate the' tubing'adjacent to a pies t;'a is"set ir. t to the desired final, height Position the,valve•above the pier;and:s) s„ topen the valve; Move thewaterscontainerupordowntowherethe'water.level is at•the desired'final height of the_ pier.,MaintainR i"`aFie water•containe in thatpositionandclosetheva14';1:' i4. •'.r P , .,< 1` 1 ' .ryi-y • —w•S, :' H-.—:1 :.' rat..—' J I Level pier§:?Move the.tUbing tothe'next pi6r., Hold the valve',r' above the pier and open it: Set the pier height to -the' level'of the'".` water ih_the tubing"and'close the,valve Repeat this step u......ntil-al.t". r}: ;Piers'2re`at the'same, evel7.t' fi s ' _a: Q r _- • 6. Complete the opposite side. Jack the other side'of the section up and install piers following the instructions above. At the completion of this step, the sec- tion should be level from fronttorearandfromsidetoside. 7. Install perimeter and marriage line piers. Install perimeter piers and for multi -section homes, marriage line piers. Position marriage line piers to pro- vide equal bearing for both matingsections. 8. Remove running gear. Remove and store, recycle or properly dispose of the hitch, axles, and wheels. These items are the property of the homeowner unless other contractual arrangements have been mnria AM Corporation (4-48 1) no more than 114 inch differ- ence between adjacent pier supports (frame or perime- ter) and the exterior doors and windows of the home do not bind and can be properly operated. Water level operation. To operate the water level properly, both ends of the system must be open to the atmosphere and there must be approximately the same amount of fluid in the tubing at all times (within a few inches). 35 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 36 Complete Multi -Section Set 1/15/09 This chapter covers the preparation and installation of additional home sections, including the structural connections be- tween units, raising and fastening hinged roofs, and fastening the home to a load -bearing perimeter wall foundation. N Lr._, r - -- ., •' ' t? 'ti` : - '1; „r . a..t .rt. a;i' k r • "Z'31= - •.jt=:i,. ' p' •"j"-, Jtµi _' +fFitc";;.R :.1.,•'17fL,` V 4"..,':' - _.t!:... i t z:i, :a .ri• _ `.i'kril. . S •'; i -, l' a 2:- ^,j u .] : i , 1=D•» ,yi..__"'' _ 'r i .., a 7 STEP:, 1'. INSTALL MARRIAGE;LINE;ANCHORS (p: 36)' u 'F:` =• % CS f . 4 F H, xt:> 1. fir_. i ` _ _1 Kt l tH •;i' 1' i:•+r-' rv,{'{.' !j •,''i _ _. +''. .E>;' a-', c:f r _ .?4. eta.•:_ . 1,t_, "' 1:{ F,' 7+-- .,ti S 3r r - r`l F'S:" v- .L t.Te ".'µ-l: " ' 4-.:.F}.^.-{n•,.-:• ,'--,, , 1'tf-;'.:->,_+T i'., r.:r:,';',. l+:t. v. _• A{y.,'3i:;' :y'1--'t'_- t -}f' i •+E, _ i:• ,• 1'•3 NG_ MATERIALS ( pi.36) +,W TEP2.REMOV&PROTECTIVE SHIPPI•-}: i ,Kii,G a^:f•f J Etl•i.,. •_ 1 •yi. f . ,y!I T -fc„(: i - i. STEP„ 3. COMPLETE HINGED, ROOF., (p: 36)''" w` + 1'r,ss' l µter'- r 1 t _ •,r• _ , i.-y r a - . •r_;:u t.•:,:'''' i-. ' , ii : - • ' f • Y?,... F. 1 o.i=i. ' 1' P. - -dry". , F'c%'.h'. . 1 ,:, . ': :., ' STEP 4-CHECK'MARRIAGE LINEGASKET 37: '.`'rz r Y' '''1" "" P;)•rrr'nr' p, rw•^yC',+7 k'• tt # _.i' ;. ':=:,-';,;.'„'.`';i;; l ' i- t :I.' h - ' ;til" ]n _'S, . i'• y. T.:(1-.,. r,lli ,_r; -r5 , E'._r.`I, tit1;! I' ...4 ,w. _ { .i .ram^:•-n `>,: :. 1 . r p- •N, F.s•. ' +^ t Q STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL -HOME SECTIONS 38)'' '"'Yr - ' {' ` -+•n:r iT _ u4_ r ;_ f'r' -.j.'r "+ 1 '?'J _ .. 1, .• i'-f 't ^' i'-i./l_. {K"-J It }._*' t ic.":; '. .'}•"t .J-; v'=_.1 , 1 y. yEy 3 1, •,= L .. ;!_'. >[.& ' ;+!!:, r4 y®,ti• '- .,rJ•}= 'e _ 7`i ' l.-,• •t!i.li; is _ .dSTEP 6:CONNECTFLOORS'(P'39) r.•., - { ='.4f' hint.': i7:• Y+... 1 v; i, °-f isI« r. .,?+r Y.fi3.,'. .:i1. .re'r _r• ,#it ` ..,: y' F 'J7::ir ' a. J:i,}'."7:r. •, `I '=1 r d-_ ,._1' u' ;}_a.._i4! c , y,, itti .r f.• " i • F I tt_-7 - :*rc7.. 7.t {{ -• -+- S: 1 .} •%{ k •, + 4 e . ,, .•' tY'- F-r -I' 1 _:,rJ,(t r.. tiSTEP-7.'C ONNECT, ROOF;(p:+• 1 i':41,'1 , : aF:,:':.- t,='r4.,,: ::ii;• _1, :t" )(., YI• n , :-r '- ,-TJ.. _t- - ' ' ;t' i, , i r' tF! E,•.. n?iJ-'!i FI:', c'` ,,,r',^'; F j i' .}'?_.,__.., •: -'7. 2 1, d - - i•-• 'tr ^.t. till,ii _;•_ 1: :i.-. t• '.7., Sr v r i ` is a' . 4J,,V! STER 8. CONNECT WALLS'(P• 4.3) , Tj 41, ri-_ • uRR r, ' If' I .;' f.,.t : t,: ,+ L , -r, r i: 11 ` Rn•,y_ - I.,.,. :+'1..- ,.,'., 1' .: `Y••'' . 1, t7 Ltf.-,-'!(=`_. ir, , , z _ ,•rr`3i - •-i . r _ "1. _` -',. '•(' ' y.J -.'`-_ ' STEPA' TAT'TACH TAG UNITS. (P•,45) %:',,M- ':ir .:i '. r: - _ . _ •a .rt' • ;-Y r ! ., r =' - - 9r "' .x,.r + t l ah •' 'Y L. .-. •l 5 - Ic : i__ __ ' i•_: a N'-,ts,-e c' .;l +I •': : yr.(c EF° '1i 'I-'t ! a:- u. t•;.: :t..t, . -' r' - .- .' i" • T, r`1.:• 2"l ' rAli'.. • :; iEi` . TREMOVE.. rMPiOF?'-R,i- rAR_-., Yf' ITEM F^- E1 oM`®` STEP10. r: l7. rJ.} S' rt_ t{'','.'(- r_pi., t-,..1'' F4^• r. 6' rL;;),,: ",.t.i1,,•n, ',-;4;'J{_ 3 e' ' ic.-`• IVr_ ' H: rl- ", ,';, t,,} 4`_= rr'• 4•t' ;- ly'_-v1r ' t?F i i'! i,. t'* ,:-. : i- hiyyw i:t6 .} Ltrs. r{. r R,'__. i»_ a.t:`.. t{ I.r#' '` s' a" i-=' 1 51'` 41 FASTEN HOME aFOUNDAIri+1i• t._:i='=J' C, ty a.!1,V; STEP11F'.'.i r e t: { 1i „• ,• i ' ' 'l rt t(lJ , u E , i _Y . ; h{.:, 3:! _ . _ ,} ,: r 1 `.. STEP,:12.'BACKEILL'AND'GRADE f (p 46),} s.' ;.'i'cii• :t? 1 I .. tJii -e.,, r1-[" fa is =. l• .i .i,i': .-, ,' t _'- - _ :yi _. ,,'. _ 'r •1: r' fir*,^,I 41 ••'3 ., r •',.lir .'(: ir cal_-' r , i .' _ „ ^F: .,e,•. _.ij'' :,• _'L'-a• { . t d 1' +; -R}: ' , h- t"' •• ; ; . ? [,' .l :,: i STEP,13' BUILD STAIRS (P•46)Fi?wt.: 1. -r • t .'tI y r •.7 1A;l. m cgR STEP 1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS If the homeis in Wind Zone II or III, install ground anchors along the marriage line now; before mating sections are joined see Install Stabilizing System (p. 65). After install- ing marriage line anchors return to this point in Complete Multi - Section Set. STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS Remove all shipping protection and associated fasteners from both home sections to be joined, including plastic used to close up the open sides during transportation. Do not remove the temporary supports holding up the ceilings at major openings. STEP 3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF If the home has a hinged roof that has been folded down for shipping, raise the roof us- ing a crane or roof jacks following the procedure below: 1. Position lift points. Position the roof lift points (jacks or crane lift points) fol- lowing the jack manufacturer or crane operator instructions. Space roof lift points equally along the length of the roof with no more than five feet from the end of the roof to the first or last lift points_ Use three lift points for a roof up to 48 feet long (excluding overhangs), four lift points for up to 60 feet, and five lift points for up to 72 feet. 2. Remove fasteners. Remove any temporary fasteners connecting the hinged portion of the roof to the vertical king posts. 3. Lift roof. Raise the roof to its intended height. A temporary slight overexten- Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) V&**VZ1Z Position roof jacks. Posi- tion jacks vertically to pre- vent the jack foot from kick- ing out or sliding. Caution during roof rais- ing. Do not enter the roof cavity during the raising procedure. Checklists for alternate construction. If the serial number (see the data plate or the chassis front cross member) has the letters AC" before or after it, then the Alternate Construction on -site check list supplied with the home must be completed and returned to the home manufacturer in a timely manner. If the AC 9: 22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. sion may be required during lifting. However, take care not to overextend the9 roof and damage the hinge. Raise the roof evenly in small increments, keep- ing it level throughout the entire process to prevent racking. Do not allow roof- ing paper and shingles to get caught in the hinge crease. (Figure 20) 4. Secure king posts. Secure the moveable portion of the king post to theridgebeambydrivingtwo (2) #8x3" wood screws through the beam and into the hinged king post (at Wind Zone 1). Use five (5) #8x3-1/2" screws at WindZoneIIorIII. (Figure 21 and Figure 22). King post Truss with angled IClnp Post. 2484'screws at Wind I. 5484-1.2"screws at wind Zone II and III. 248:3".ctew at Wind Zone I. 5#Es7-1/I aaews at Wind Zone II and III I I Factory Instilled 2.6 mi. Ridgebeam 5. Redistribute Insulation. Before closing up the attic space check that the in- sulation has not shifted. Re -level the insulation if needed. 6. Install gable walls. Assembled frames or wall studs and sheathing needed for the site assembly of the gable end walls may be provided. Install the gableendwallsforeachhomesectionasfollowsFigure23. End wall completion: Studs: Install studs 16 inches o.c. with 3-12d nails or 4-15Ga.x7/l6"x2- 1/2" staples, and; Sheathing: Install 3/8" min OSB sheathing with 8d nails or 16Ga. x 7/16" x1-1/2" staples 6" o.c. 9:22 Ivi . Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) to checklist relates to the roof, then failure to do so may require future disassembly of the roof and further in- spections. Figure 20. Typical roof lifting arrangement. The final position of the truss is shown on the truss detail included with this manual. Figure 21. Ridge beam to hinged king post fastening 1HlJt uttui r P'eY T 6tSTE PE19600312 o •' STATE OF 90" zNDIANP••' N N S,ONA; trNG` Jeffrey T. Legault eA 2009.01.09 11:25:07-05'00' Figure 22. Alternate ridge beam to king post fastening PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O r= Q J J Q 1-- U) Z Z O Q O IL W O U w Z J Y rn 7. Install vents. Extend plumbing vents, exhaust fans, appliance vents, and fire- place stacks through the hinged portion of the roof in strict accordance with this manual (Prepare Appliances and Equipment, p. 86) and/or supplemen- tal instructions provided by the home manufacturer. 8. Roof Close-up. A paper spacer has been placed between the two courses of shingles at the hinge to prevent premature sealing of the upper course. Re- move this paper and fasten the upper course in place as shown on the shingle installation instructions. Repeat procedure on other half of home. The units should now be joined together. The fastening of the ridgebeam halves to- gether as specified in this manual can be accomplished either by reachingdownfromtheroofopeningattheridgeorbymovingalonginsidetheroof cavity. Care should be taken not to damage the ceiling during this operation. 9. Ridge Assembly. Some models will require the framing of the peak area of the home to be completed on site. Extend peak close off frame from each half until they meet at the mating line. (Figure 24) Fasten each peak frame block to each truss top chord w/3-10d nails. Fasten the peak rails together w/10d nails 8" o.c. or w/#8x3" screws 8" o.c. Attach the roof sheathing at the peak to the blocking w/15Ga.x7/16"x1-1/2" staples or 8d nails 4" o.c. There is not a removable piece of roof decking at the peak (for ridgebeam access with this type of construction. Install roof felt and remaining shingles to complete the peak close -off. Extend peak sections 14 to mating line. hgjj site instal root sheathing at Fasten peak rails together h Peak (slapped loose). wMOd nub U N6a3' scm/a Q' ox Hinged I typical) typical) Fasten each dock to each o.c tons w/170d Nils 00011Q STEP 4. CHECK MARRIAGE LINE GASKET A continuous, non -porous gasket creating a permanent air barrier must be installed on at least one side of the marriage line; along the floor, end walls and ceiling (and mar- riage lines for any tag units). Skyline Corp. has installed this gasket in the factory. In- spect the gasket and repair any gaps or tears. If not installed at the factory, install a continuous gasket between the home sections along the floor, end walls, and ceiling (Figure 25). For homes with through -the -rim crossover ducts (see Crossover Connections, p. 52) inspect and if necessary, repair gaskets around the rim joist duct openings using 3/4- inch thick fiberglass duct board or other material acceptable to the manufacturer. En- sure that duct openings are unobstructed. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 38 to HUD MH 1/15/09 Figure 23. End wall comple- tion i // Inspecting vents. Fuel fired heating appliance and fire- place vents that pass through a hinged roof must be completed and in- spected at the site prior to energizing the appliance or occupying the home. Fail- ure to comply with this pre- caution may result in seri- ous injury or death. Venting systems must be installed in conformance with the appliance manufacturer's instructions and any in- structions supplied with the home. Figure 24. Ridge Assembly i /, Checking through -the -rim - ducts. Ensure that through - the -rim -duct connections are secure and tight after the home sections are to- gether. PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Ridge beam Mating line gasket (factory installed) at endKalls, Floor mating line and ridge beam bottom flange. Mating line rim joist HUD MH 1/15/09 STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS Follow this procedure to install additional home sections: 1. Remove obstructions. Remove protruding nails and staples or anything elsethatwillkeepthehomesectionsfromfittingtogethersnugly. If present, cut the temporary ceiling and floor plates at the edges of marriage line openings tak- ing care not to damage ceiling or floor coverings or displace temporary mar- riage line support posts (these supports and the plates will be removed after the home sections have been structurally connected). 2. Complete crossovers. Before moving the two sections together, complete any crossover connections that require access from the open marriage line, including the attic duct connection (if present) and marriage wall interior elec- trical connections (see Connect Crossovers, p.52). 3. Position section. Position the section as closely as possible (ideally within six inches) and line up with the previously set section. If using a mechanical positioning system or crane, follow the system manufacturers instructions or the crane operator's directions. 4. Construct piers. With the outside walls of the home aligned, construct the piers for the home section according to the instructions in Set the Home (p. 30) before continuing to the steps below. 5. Level section. Lower the section onto the outside piers first, inside piers last. Before releasing the mechanical positioning system, check interior doorways and other openings for misalignments that may cause problems during trim - out. The floors should be flush, level, and tight and the roof section should have little, if any, gap at the top of the marriage line. Use at least two come -a - longs to pull the sections snugly together and use the water level or other lev- eling device to set all piers and shims. 6. Shim gaps. Shim any gaps up to one inch between structural elements with dimensional lumber. If any gaps exceed one inch, re -position the home to eliminate such gaps. STEP 6. CONNECT FLOORS Make floor structural connections according to one of the methods described below. Method 1: Install fasteners through rim joists With the home aligned at the floor and supported by its foundation, join the floors as shown in Figure 26 using the fastener type, size, and spacing indicated on Table 13. A gap of 1" is allowable. Gaps larger than'/2" must be filled with plywood orlumbershims. AM ne Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 Figure 25. Mating Line Gas- ket Mechanical posi- tioning system. For a pier - set home, a mechanical positioning system (such as a roller system) will make the process easier and safer and be less likely to damage the home. Sealing gaps. Prior to com- pletion of the exterior close- up, gaps that do not exceed one inch are permitted be- tween structural elements provided that the gaps are closed before completion of close-up, the home sec- tions are in contact with each other, and the mar- riage gasket provides a proper seal. fn r Z M n O o O O Z Z Cn q D r r D O Z D Z C D r k0 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q ' 7 Z Q Z O a JJ a in Z Z O i`- Q O a O U W Z J Y CO 40 TABLE 13. FLOOR CONNECTION FASTENING SPECIFICATIONS Lag screw with 3/8" x 3"" 24 - 36 in. 24 - 36 in. washer Increase fastener lengths by 3 inches for double rim joists. blarriage Line Floor) F astener DeckingRim Joists Along MieMarriage Line Lire Gasket - Fastener staggered At Next Saacino Interval 24-36in. Install additional fasteners as indicated below, making sure to repair any openings in the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose (may be provided). Install two additional fasteners at each end of the home at approximately a 45 degree angle (+/- 5 degrees) from horizontal. If the home has a through -the -rim crossover duct, install one additional fas- tener at each side of the duct opening. After installation of fasteners, repair tears or holes in the bottom board using tape specially made for that purpose. Corporation (4-48 PG. Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 26. Floor connection Patch bottom board. Use adhesive spray, mastic, and/or diver- gent staples in combination with bottom board tape for a more secure and durable connection. I 9:22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Conforms to HUD MHCSS STEP 7. CONNECT ROOF 12/16/09 If the marriage line along the roof is not snug, position jacks every 20 feet or less alongtheoutsideI-beam and uniformly lift the section until the roof area is tight. Check to make sure the ceiling joint is flush before installing the connections. If not, use a jack and tee to raise whichever ceiling is low, starting at the front and working totherearofthehome. Fasten the roof along the marriage line using one of the methodsbelowforeitherdoubleortriple -section homes. DOUBLE -SECTION HOMES Make roof structural connections in double -section homes according to the method de- scribed below. Install fasteners through ridge beam To obtain access into the ceiling cavity, fold back the underlayment paper and remove the 16" wide sheathing panel(s) at the peak. The beam halves may be bolted or lagscrewedtogether. Install bolts or lag screws at 24" o.c. with 6 additional bolts/lags overinteriorbeamsupports. (Figure 27). Predrill Ya" piliot holes for lag screws at 1-1/2" down from the top of the beam and with a maximum offset from horizontal of 45 de- grees. Use fastener sizes as specified in Table 14. Stagger fasteners on each side of marriage line. Spacing indicated is on -center, both sides of ridge. Fasteners may beinstalledfromone -side of ridge beam only. NOTE: (1) When team support consists 'to column Imtead at Ce"tertim bearing wall. use 6 boltsAags at W o C. each Sided Column. 2) Beam markod with point at Column locations, TABLE 14. ROOF Bolts with washers both sides 45 PM 3/8" x 4-1/2" 24 in. 24 in. 24 in. Skyline Closing the roof gap. Level and fasten the marriage line joint at the floor before jacking to tighten a roof gap. DO NOT use roof fas- teners to close any gaps. Separation of the ridge beams and trusses may occur. Figure 27. Ridge beam fas- tening 41 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-69. J Q D Z Q Z O l— Q J J Q H N Z_ Z O Q O a W O fJ W Z J Y 42 In Wind Zones II and III an optional metal cap or straps may be installed as follows: Caps Select metal caps made of minimum 8" x 30 ga galvanized steel or 0.019" aluminum. Install caps continuously, overlapping by minimum of four inches at splices. Fasten caps with 1" x 1" x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12 ga 1-1/4" long x 3/8" diameter head roof nails or #8 x 1-1/4" sheet metal screws at two inches o.c. both sides of ridge. Straps Select metal straps made of minimum 1-1/2" wide x 26 ga galvanized steel or 0.019" aluminum. Space straps a minimum of 96 inches o.c. for Wind Zone II and a minimum 80 inches o.c. for Wind Zone III. TRIPLE -SECTION HOMES For triple -section homes where roof lines run parallel to each other on adjacent unitsFigure29), follow the instructions in the appropriate method below to complete the connections at the roof. Method 1: Install fasteners through pre -installed sheathing For homes where sheathing is in place on both sides of the marriage line (Figure 28) install fasteners from the low side of the roof on an angle so as to penetrate roof beams on both sides of marriage line, using the fastener specifications and spacings indicated on Table 15. Center Section Outer SecEan Factory -Installed_ Ups) Skyline Factory -Installed Shingles Factory-Instatled Shingles Asphalt Roofing Cemeru Between Layers of Undedaymenl W FWiide C 4-48 PG. 1) is to 1/15/09 Installing lags. If lags are used to connect roofs, use pilot holes and use appro- priately sized washers. When to use metal straps. If a ridge vent will be in- stalled, use straps instead of a continuous cap. Figure 28.Triple-section roof connection Method 1 See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Adden- dum for Triplewide homes for additional information. AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Mardape Line— — — — — — — — — — — idge Lira Marriage Lhe I I Plan E6wCm TABLE 15. ROOF CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS Conforms to HUD MHCSS VIS109 Method 2: Install fasteners with ship loose sheathing For homes where sheathing is shipped loose to be installed on site (Figure 30) fasten field -installed sheathing to all underlying blocking and framing with 15 ga 7/16" x 1-1/2" staples at four inches o.c. in field and perimeter. Field Installed shingles Field installed sheathing Field Installed underlayment Asphaft roofing cement bwtween layers of underlayment (min. 6' wide) Factory installed shingles Factory installed underlayment installed sheathing STEP 8. CONNECT WALLS Once the home is secured along the marriage line floor and roof, secure end walls, in- terior doorways, and marriage line partitions according to the appropriate method de- scribed below. END WALLS Install toed fasteners through sheathing Toe fasteners through sheathing from the exterior at an approximately 45 degree angle 5 degrees) (Figure 31) according to the fastener specifications and spacing re- quirements in Table 16. 9:22 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) Figure 29.Triple-section home Figure 30.Triple-section roof connection Method 2 43 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q z Q z O H Q JJ Q z z O I— Q O CL W O U W z J Y 44 Gasket wau St= Exterior Siding or Exterior Siding Underlayment I Fastener TABLE 16. END WALL FASTENER SPECIFICATIONS Lag screw, :r,; ;; i _;_';;3a_ .fit P}x' SfY;e ii 'ram Wood screw #8 x 3" Bin. o.c. L MARRIAGE WALL COLUMNS, OPENINGS AND INTERIOR PARTITIONS Make connections inside the home along the marriage walls (Figure 32 and Figure 33) by installing fasteners according to the specifications and spacing requirements in Table 17. Toe screw 2 x 4 or 2 x 6 studs; through -screw 2 x 3 studs. Interior Wal half 0== ring nog Opbonet Field Applied Gypen+ oa Not Less Than 2e' Nor Boer Than W. Fasten Per Notes Fasteners Marriage Line I___—.—. uppoM1 Purls ne Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 i AW Conforms to 111.PJN1iCss 1/15/09 Figure 31. End wall connec- tion toed through sheathing Figure 32. Marriage wall connections Figure 33. Marriage line col- umn connections 9:22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. TABLE 17. MARRIAGE WALL CONNECTION SPECIFICATIONS STEP 9. ATTACH TAG UNITS After the main unit has been set on its foundation, install all tag units according to thefollowingprocedure: 1. Position and block the tag. Position the tag unit as close to the main unit as possible at its intended location. Use a hitch jack to obtain approximate level- ing and install pier supports according to Set the Home, STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION (p. 30). Determine whether the tag and main unit floors are designed to line up flush or are offset by a step and adjust the tag pier heights accordingly. 2. Level the unit. Using a water level (p.34), verify that the piers are level. The elevation of all points along the lower flange of the I-beam should be no more than 3/8 inches from the desired height and should not deviate more than 3/4 inches overall. 3. Connect floors. If the floor of the tag unit is level with main unit floor, connect the floors together as described in STEP 5. CONNECT FLOORS (p. 39). Connect walls. Secure the tag unit walls to the main unit sidewall using #8 x4" screws at 12 inches o.c. (see Figure 34). The sheathing shown in the detail may not be included by the manufacturer. If included, the sheathing over the last stud bay was tacked in place at the factory for easy removal at the site. Once the wall connections are complete, re -install the sheathing and completethesidinginstallation. 4. Connect roofs. Connect the tag unit roof to the main unit roof using #10 x 5" screws or 3/8" x 6" lag screws, toe screwed at each main unit vertical struc- tural member (stud or truss) location. See Figure 35 for flush roof connections AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) PR 05 rms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Piers under tag units. Some tag units have spe- cial piering needs due to the roof and/or floor con- struction. These will be de- tailed in supplemental pier- ing plans supplied with the home. Note that tag unit end walls are typically load bearing rather than side walls. Figure 34. Tag unit wall connection 45 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q M z Q z O F- Q J J Q t— z z O F- Q O a O U u.l z J Y and Figure 36 for roof connections with an offset greater than two inches. Roof connections with an offset less than two inches do not require screws. Slinph Ihtlorhyn.ma helot FYanhy FA orvJoke Metal P-ck Feale— Rao/Codhp Mal. I. hlTapMiMainthlMetalFlad"( ar Tap CourseofMinf'I Sidnp) lli Faa Wv STEP 10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS Once the home is properly supported and the marriage line connections are completed, remove the temporary ridge beam supports and wall/ceiling plates used to brace the ridge beam during shipment. Take care not to damage the ceiling. Remove and store or properly dispose of or recycle the hitch, axles, and wheels. These items are the property of the homeowner unless other contractual arrangements have been made. STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION Fasten the home to the foundation (typically to the sill plate) according to the fastening schedule provided by the manufacturer. STEP 12. BACKFILL AND GRADE Backfill against the foundation wall to the height of the waterproofing, taking care to not damage the drainage system. Grade the site as described in Prepare the Site, STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE (p.14). STEP 13. BUILD STAIRS Construct the basement stairs in compliance with the local building code. Take care that adequate headroom is maintained under beams and that there is sufficient landing space at the bottom of the stairs. 111111. informs to ID MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 35. Tag unit flush roof connection Figure 36. Tag unit offset roof connection i When to backfill. Backfill against basement walls only after the home is con- nected to the foundation or the basement walls may deflect inward or collapse. Cutting the chassis. Do not cut, notch, bend, or alter in any manner beams, cross - members, and other parts of the steel chassis. i Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 46 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. is to Complete Roof and Exterior ..WaIIs' This chapter covers closing up and weatherproofing the home by completing the roofing and siding. r '•y'J.. C-:i" 7; ^-1 :';+11 F''yk u •A',T.'; .. 2x ••I :,]S i' ` :4..' r1; i: .., i^; ... ' i• _ r . . tT 'I.. : 1. ..I,`., ,,? '(S!'1 't't Yre -'•l-•-;. .j.rr{r .; r,;-„I}0`STEP.L,COMPLETE -ROOF ., ,,; = s a4,] .ti•-: _;,,,.`.t,"_.. Yp"47),,=^ r,?,' s ''i '-- '," :F'"'"t'° ' , - '1; {,k. yri;? .r{' ,'•. •'T.. • :'}•. t',li Ijk .J .7 4•., .I_ _- 4' r t I'• .y"• , -`. ,,i _' I 3 ..1 . a..i:%`wa Y. EP, 3. COMPLETE S' r' ' }" ' IDE, WALLS "' p':.49)` -`• r _ 1s i,-; t- .,q iti'',• Earsn.o" .aIt_ r.y- ,' STEP I. COMPLETE ROOF RIDGE CLOSEUP For multi -section homes, the first step in completing the exterior is sealing the roof along the ridge line (Figure 37). For homes with asphalt shingles, follow the procedurebelow. For homes with metal or other roofing materials, follow the instructions that come with the roofing materials or provided as a supplement to this manual. Cap SNrgle uea«I.y,nent d Zone 2 a 3 ay) Factory Instaled Stirgles L Fecbry Installed Shingles Underlaymenl Roof Deck 1. Install underlayment (when sheathing at the ridge is installed on site). Make sure the roof sheathing is already installed (see Complete Multi -Section Set, STEP 6. CONNECT ROOF, p. 39). Install 15# felt or equivalent continuously along the length of the ridge, covering all exposed sheathing and overlapping sheathing joints by at least five inches on each side. Fasten using 1" x 1" x 16 ga galvanized staples. For Wind Zones II and III, also apply a six inch wide strip of roofing cement along each side of ridge under the underlayment. 2. Install shingles. If shingles have been left off at the ridge line for site installa- tion, install them now using 1" x 1" x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12ga 1-1/4" long, 3/8" diameter head roof nails. For Wind Zone I, fasten at 5/8 inch above each tab cutout slot and one at each end of the shingle one inch in from the edge (four fasteners for a three -tab shingle) (Figure 38). For Wind Zones II and III, use two fasteners 5/8 inch above and on either side of the tab slots and one at each end of the shingle one inch in from the edge (six fasteners for a three -tab shingle). Do not fasten through the shingle tar line. 1 36'Shlnple - . i -36'Shlrgle x x 'r x x X. .x x. x 12• x Fastener Lootbns ___ L__L1IL 3. Install underlayment. Install 15# felt or equivalent underlayment that is at least 10 inches wide continuously along the ridge. Fasten with 1"x 1" x 16 ga galvanized staples. For Wind Zones II and III, also apply a six inch wide strip AM Skyline PG. Figure 37. Shingle installa- tion at ridge V /Z Weatherproofing. It is vitally, important to close up the home quickly to protect the interior from damage due to inclement weather. Removing shipping protec- tion. Remove shipping pro- tection from the roof prior to completing roofing. Figure 38.Shingle fastener locations for Wind Zone l left) and Wind Zones 11 and Ill (right). r z m n O v O d O Z Z Cn D r d O Z D Z c D r 47 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 48 of roofing cement on both sides of the ridge under the underlayment. 4. Install shingle cap. Starting at the opposite end of the home from the prevail- ing wind, install ridge cap shingles provided by the manufacturer or use 12" x 12" shingles (36" shingles cut into three equal pieces) (Figure 39). Install us- ing 1" x 1" x 16 ga galvanized staples or 12 ga 1-1/4" long, 3/8" diameter head roofing nails spaced 5-5/8 inches from bottom edge and 1/2 inch to 1-1/2 inches in from both edges. Cover the exposed fasteners with tar or cement. Cut shingle Into three pieces as shown by dolleljd line 1 L_1j2i3 HINGE ROOF CLOSE-UP For homes with hinged roofs, complete roofing underlayment and shingles along the hinge line (Figure 40) as follows: 1. Install underlayment. Attach the underlayment to the roof deck with a mini- mum of six-inch wide strip of cement. If necessary, trim the underlayment to allow the lowest shingle above the hinge of the roof to seal to the topmost shingle on the lower portion of the roof. Site Install Shingles In Hinged Area Per The Instructions On The Shingle Package Shipped Loose With The Home. t After Roof Is In The Raised Position, uVQa Trim The Shingle UndedayrnentTo Allow The Shingle Of The Upper Roof Section To Seal Onto The Last Shingle Of The Lower Roof Section. d t spy° underlayment Asphalt Roofing Cement Between Layers of Underlayment Minumum 6" W ide 2. Install shingles. Install missing shingles according to the shingle manufac- turer's instructions. COMPLETE TRIPLE -SECTION ROOFS Complete roofing along triple -section home marriage lines according to one of the fol- lowing methods based on the construction of the home. Method 1: Dual ridge beams 1. Install underlayment. Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof and apply a minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement to the sheathing. Lay the underlayment of the center section on top of the cement (see Best Practice tip for optional metal flashing). Fold down the center section roof un- derlayment on this cement. 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s) of shingles, securing them per the shingle manufacturer's installation instructions (refer to the shingle wrapper). Skyline 1) Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 V&Irzzj Installing a ridge vent. If a ridge vent is to be installed, follow the ridge vent manu- facturers instructions pro- vided with the material or as an addendum to this manual in lieu of underlay- ment over ridge line and shingle cap. Figure 39. Shingle cut into thirds Figure 40. Shingle installa- tion at hinge line Installing metal flashing. Install optional metal flashing over the roof decking before applying roofing cement. Fold back the underlayment and fas- ten 30 ga x 6" wide mini- mum galvanized metal with roofing nails or 16 ga x 1" crown staples of sufficient length to penetrate the roof sheathing. Space fasteners four inches o.c. or less near the edge of the metal. Overlap the metal by at least two inches at joints. 9/2009 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Center Section Outer Sectim Factory -Installed— HUD MHCS: 1/15/09 Field -Installed SKngles Method 2: Field -installed sheathing 1. Install underlayment. Fold down the underlayment of the outer section roof and fold up the underlayment on the center section roof. Apply to the lower roof underlayment a minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement centered on the sheathing joint. Cover with the shipped loose underlayment. Apply an- other minimum six-inch wide strip of roofing cement to the ship loose under- layment centered on the upper roof sheathing joint. 2. Install shingles. Install missing row(s) of shingles per the shingle manufac- turer's installation instructions (refer to the shingle wrapper). Factory installed underlayment Field Installed shingles Field installed sheathing r Feld Installed undedayment I( J Asphalt roofing cement bwlween layers or underlayment (min. 6- wide) Installed shingles installed sheathing STEP 2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF If the home has a tag unit, complete roofing for this unit now. The process for complet- ing the roof is different for flush and offset roofs. Follow the instructions in the appropri- ate section below. FLUSH ROOFS For flush roofs, complete roofing along the marriage line and at the valley line as fol- lows (see Figure 43): ZZ AM Skyline Corporation PG. 1 Figure 41. Triple -section roof connection Method 1 See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Adden- dum for Triplewide homes for additional information. Figure 42. Triple -section roof connection Method 2 rA r z m 0 O X O I O z z rn I D r r D O z D z c D r 49 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Fastener Tag Unt Shirgb Urderlhyment Instaover Fhahng Flat Over Jo ie Man Unt Marriage line Method 1: Install metal flashing (minimum 30 ga x minimum 6" wide) over the joint between the main roof dormer and tag unit roof. Secure the flashing to the roof decks on both dormer and tag unit roofs with roofing nails or 16 ga staples with a one inch crown and long enough to fully penetrate the roof decks. Space fasteners maximum two inches o.c. near the edge of the flashing. Overlap seams in the metal by at least two inches. After flashing is complete, install shingles per shingle manufacturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF (p. 47). Method 2: Install two layers of roofing underlayment or equivalent over the joint between the main roof dormer and tag unit roof lapping the factory installed under- layment a minimum of six inches on each side and fully cemented at the laps. In- stall shingles per shingle manufacturer instructions and ridge cap/vent according to STEP 1. COMPLETE ROOF (p. 47). Valley line Along the bottom of the valley, shingles and one or more layers of roll roofing may need to be installed. If fastened to the roof at the factory, unroll the roofing, overlap the tag roof and trim the roofing to the roof edge. If shipped loose, install the roll roofing at the valley, lapping it under the factory installed roll roofing a minimum of 12 inches and fully cement the roofing at the lap. Complete shingles at the valley either by interweav- ing them or by trimming back approximately four inches from the valley line and fully cementing the exposed shingle edges. OFFSET ROOFS If there is a gap between the main unit dormer overhang and the tag unit roof of less than two inches, fold up the main unit dormer fascia, slide the underlayment and flash- ing from the tag unit roof behind the fascia, and bend the fascia back down and secure into sub -fascia with metal screws (Figure 44). Skyline PG. 1) 1/15/09 Figure 43. Tag unit flush roof connection See Skyline Corporation Manufactured Home Adden- dum for Triplewide homes for additional information 1 /9/2009 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 41 1 rx gp,- HUD MH( Y''" Main lint Roof 1/15/09 Shngtes Na Fadonyantalled Flashing Undedayment Carried Up Into Donner SubFasda Sho—on Man UnFbrclr'g) Drip Edge Fascia Fascia Man Una Damn Factory-Inst Distance Between Main Unit I I F \ Donner and Tay Unit Roof May —J Vary (Min. It' to Max of 2) UrxlrBym•nt Ora Rmed Roofing Carved Up into Tag UM usTayUnitTn Dam•r SubFascia Mn.J Roof Main Unit Dormer Truss If the gap between the main unit dormer overhang and the tag unit roof is two inches or more, bend up the inside corner trim at the dormer overhang and main unit sidewall, fold up the factory installed flashing on the tag unit roof, fold the inside corner trim back down, and secure into dormer wall with metal screws (Figure 45) Main Unit Fascia Roof Decking Metal Flashing —' or Top Course of VirtyI Siring) Roof Decking UnlitUnlitFastenerTag STEP 3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS Siding necessary to complete the exterior has been provided with the home. Follow the siding manufacturer's instructions (found on or with the packaging or as an addendum to this manual) and to complete the exterior siding as follows: 1. Remove shipping protection. Remove temporary shipping protection from walls. 2. Complete crossovers. Complete any crossover connections in the walls, in- cluding: electrical, stereo speaker, doorbell, telephone, and intercom wires. 3. Install siding. Fasten siding only at stud locations, avoiding electrical wiresthatarepresentinthewalls. 4. Install close-up of strips. If siding has been installed on the end walls at the factory, fasten close-up strips securely along both edges and seal the edges with a waterproof sealant. 5. Install trim. Install any matching trim required to complete the installation. 6. Seal penetrations. With a waterproof sealant, seal any penetrations in the siding that may have been caused by temporary shipping protection. a a a • • • a tE 9 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) Figure 44. Tag unit roohng connection with less than two inch height difference Figure 45. Tag unit offset roof connection Covering the HUD label. Do not cover the HUD label on the exterior of the home. Removing shipping protec- tion. Remove temporary shipping protection from walls before installing sid- ing or serious moisture damage may result. n A r z m n O O d O z z n D r r D i O z D z C D r 51 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Crossouersti1S;-,,a 4 sS y;Yf. J Q Z Q Z O F- Q JJ Q l•- Z Z O r= Q O a W O U W Z J Y rn 52 Connect Crossovers HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 This chapter covers crossover connections between units of multi -section homes, including ducts and electrical, water, waste, gas, telephone, and cable TV connections. r -!r'la .d:' , i`i' t ' ,(.; ::Ii'd r• {. •;1Yi'.,,y` - 'fir,, tl} Mft. - . 4,+. ; 'r.,l ; F1:..K c v... r'' li a'r,'.,_. r •'n`' . et. i?. e; - ,J+; j -'- 7'lii J Ey jIY: ',rt STEP'1. CONNECT! DUCTS,(p: 52) ' : irz Y : i.'_' ' ` ati, r '_.u't' -l7. _ ... - `knr•" r_. ttYl#.Cn .:J7 7 r• ._,l__ : ,.T'L ' r.• 1 C._ F Q"STEP.,' 2.'CONNECT,EL'ECTRICAL•°CROSSOVERS (p.56)'- }I`'t 'A., yd', _tr _ :rti '•t't'-lr^`:. "•y:' i;f'-4' It7-11n{iid. {7- -^ ; 01atr - : r., , _..I1 r= 1, y ' i 4 _`r __ra. !Lt{, } _ !' : _' ,„r'.S:= - -•.. tLiTEP`'3ANSTALL'4ELECTRICAL<BONDING . • : Q' S_ - • - r-P'' 58 .)••_,_r• _':'•. ' i,: T : , ih at_•:' cr i'=t -,-" ''* -d ti r' i trkl'r; i Cu» " = ;. _ - 3 r:••' +-i '•f!••:•Y1& „+, `i;-;^ i - - ;: ,=-' a_.-• }' -i _ :'' 3'q i3•C1.,_ _ lei::<, i .' V..,, '- k• -r i.f ';. :.: G:' 1 <, -.1 ' bra r.(J • -rLi 'l ii 1t:1.:r. t#1.. STEP 4. CONNECT WATERLINES (p. 59Y: _ ',{.y*: k - ' k^_ =' `. L '' ;- ilr'. M;14;r-jT..; n iY1:': = i.. r +' _ ,_•',•' r'• ,.'_'< !•' .{ - ., IT u` a ;j. .,r l., + Y s' ;' ti' '{ ia. li:. i. YM.• !fj tt {', , ;i!i r`^ i =" :.'}-i •-•%.'_ 1 15 a`L.E'•:SVeit 'qr'. i i•[!"i 1, Yy , i .. 'i_"Y, i'r„ '1'i, _, _-* i ' ' Fa. {' , _ - - .i'- ;• j` i '' , { STEP 5.'CONNECT-,DRAIN,'WASTE, AND_VENTfLINES (p.'60). T. c -:._.•` 1 STEP 6. CONNECT''GAS•LINES; (p. 61) f { t JJ. L;, c_ v • r: - 7i-t--'• ' •t/... 7. r F; 'Pic';{; I - t';- r F'' r. , 17i.;+ .. - 1 r,'+ yl,. .: Cn:'- .i• ( [c' -i H: '*r .. L.-_ :i+ r ..'-f .. , STEPJ. CONNECT'TELEPHONE AND CABLE -TV WIRING (p.'62) ,, ,!'r ` '' ?# `" r'''r. `,:;• T' STEP 1. CONNECT DUCTS There are three main types of duct crossover connections. Based on the location of the duct, follow the installation steps on the page indicated below: Under the floor (p. 52). In the roof cavity (p. 54). In floor, through -the -rim joist (p. 54) To prevent air leakage, seal all ductwork connections, including duct collars using one or more of the following materials: Galvanized metal straps in combination with galvanized sheet metal screws. For rigid air ducts and connectors, tape and mastics listed to UL 181A. For flexible air ducts and connectors, tape and mastics listed to UL 181 B. UNDER FLOOR FLEXIBLE CROSSOVER DUCT When heating or cooling equipment is installed in the home, the flexible crossover duct is provided by the manufacturer. In all cases the crossover duct must be listed for exte- rior use. There are four common configurations of under floor crossover ducts depending on the number of home sections and the furnace/air handler location. See Table 18 to locate the appropriate figure. TABLE 18. UNDER FLOOR DUCT CONFIGURATIONS Furnace over trunk duct See Figure 46 See Figure 48 r,-: u, - i ,, _ eejFigure 47i ? '` 'jitt; t_:5ee'Figure 49 riaie,offset from bunk dctiu-;, i r:r;,• - tit-> ine Corporation (4-48 V&*# ZZJ Qualified personnel. Use only qualified personnel to make crossover connec- tions. Consult the LAHJ for licensing or any additional crossover connection re- quirements. Access for service. When- ever possible maintain ac- cess to connection areas for future maintenance. Make tight connections. Permanent, durable, and tight crossover duct con- nections are critical to the proper performance of the home. Leaky ducts can re- sult in severe moisture problems in the home, dis- comfort from rooms not re- ceiving the proper amount of conditioned air, and high utility bills from wasted heating and/or cooling en- ergy. 9: 22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 1/15/09 Furnace Air Figure 46. Furnace over A Sedtion Ha® B Seam trunk duct, two home sec- tions Floor Heal Dud Tap -Out Collar Field -Installed Flex Flex Dud Dud Support Straps Furnace Mir Figure 47. Furnace offset A Section Handler B Section from trunk duct two home sections Floor HeatD Tap -Out Cdlar Field -Installed Flex Dud Flex Duct SupportSbaps V"-Box Under Furnace Furnace Air Figure 48. Furnace over A section I I H ael B Section C Section trunk duct, three home sec - Li tions Heat Dud- / Tap -Out Cdfar-/ Feldarestaled Flex Dud tr-Box Under Furnace Flex Dud Support Sbaps A Section Furnace/Au B Section C Section LU Handler Figure 49. Furnace offsetLifromtrunkduct, three home T sections Installed Flex Dud 1r-Box Flex Dud SupportSbapsUnderFurnace For under floor flexible crossover ducts follow the steps below: 1. Locate collars. Locate the metal crossover collars (or V-box) connected to the main trunk duct (or furnace) under the home and remove temporary ship- ping protection. 2. Install inner duct. Slide the crossover duct inner liner over the crossover col- Securing the IarN-box as far as it will go. Temporarily fasten the inner liner in place with crossover. Between Step duct tape. Install a large nylon zip -tie over the inner liner just above the "ridge" 5 and Step 6, drill three or around the crossover collarN-box. Apply mastic completely over inner liner more 1h6 inch holes an and collarN-box (alternately, the mastic may be applied to the collarN-box equal distance around and prior to sliding the duct inner liner over it). just below the bottom edge 3. Connect duct insulation. Bring the duct insulation up over the zip -tie and above the home's bottom board into the floor cavity. Temporarily duct of the nylon zip -tie. Install Pan head screws in tape itYPYPagainstthebaseofthetrunkductN-box. thethese holes, through the 4. Pull duct wrap. Pull the crossover duct outer wrap over the top of the insula- flexible duct and into the metal crossover collarN- tion and temporarily secure it to the trunk ductN-box with duct tape. box. The screw heads 5. Install zip -tie. Feel for the nylon zip -tie that was installed over the inner liner. should be against the zip - Place another nylon zip -tie just under the first one to permanently secure the tie. crossover duct insulation and outer wrap. 6. Trim duct. Trim the crossover duct to length such that the installed duct will be straight with no kinks or unnecessary bends. i ' // 7. Connect other end. Follow the same procedure (steps 1 through 5) to con- nect the opposite end of the crossover duct and any other crossover ducts. Cover exposed metal. 8. Seal joints. Seal the joints between the bottom board and the crossover duct Completely cover all ex- posed metal connectorswithfoamormastic. with insulation. Apply seal- 9. Support duct. Support the crossover duct(s) above the ground using nylon or ants and tapes only to sur- galvanized metal straps and saddles spaced every 48 inches o.c. or less. faces that are dry and free 9 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) N X r Z m n O X 0 O O Z Z D r r O Z D Z c D r 53 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q D Z Q Z O i=- Q J J Q F Z_ Z O O a w O U 1JJ Z J Y 54 p i AW Conforms to HUD MHCSS 3/19/09 Choose straps at least 1/2 inch wider than the spacing of the metal spirals en- of dust, dirt, and grease. casing the crossover duct. Install the straps so they cannot slip between spi- Avoid ground contact. In- rals. Secure metal straps with galvanized screws. stalled crossover ducts must not be in contact with ROOF CAVITY CROSSOVER DUCT the ground. For ducts installed in the roof cavity, follow the steps below: Unobstructed airflow. Ex- 1. Access duct. Access the crossover location through an access panel in the cess length, kinks and roof and remove any temporary shipping protection. bends in the crossover duct 2. Join ducts. Using the provided flexible duct, join the distribution boxes in will restrict airflow and de - each section of the home as shown in Figure 50, cutting off any extra duct grade the home's HVAC length to keep the duct as straight as possible. The duct is connected to one system performance. side of the home. 3. Fasten ducts. At each connection point between ducts and between ducts and distribution boxes or connectors, secure the inner duct liner with a nylon strap, apply mastic completely over the connection area, pull the duct insula- tion and outer liner over the connection area, and secure them with a second nylon strap. 4. Reinstall panel. Reinstall and secure the access panel. M,eiti Figure 50. Duct crossover located in the roof cavity r<nq IN THE FLOOR CROSSOVER DUCT i , / AWhereoneormorecrossoverductsarebuiltintothehome's floor system, connect them either through (note openings in rim joists) or under (note access panels in bot- Additional marriage line tom board) the rim joist depending on the design of the home. support. If the duct runs Method 1: Flex duct through rim joist through the marriage line Connect flex ducts that pass through the rim joist (Figure 51) as follows: rim joist, and perimeter 1. Access duct. From underneath the home, cut through the bottom board and blocking is required, a pe- part the floor insulation to access the duct. rimeter pier is required un- tderthemarriagewallatthe 2. Extend duct. Extend the flex duct from the side of the home with the furnace crossover location or u through the rim joist opening and connect it to the opposing duct using the less the home is con - provided splicing collar. structed with a perimeter 3. Connect duct. Connect the ducts using the procedure for joining under floor support system. flexible crossover ducts (p. 52). 4. Seal bottom board. Move the floor insulation back to its original location and seal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose (may be pro- vided). I Figure 51. In -floor duct with Marriage Line — I Splicing Collar flex duct connection though the rim joist (shown with peri- Joint I boring Decking peter frame System) meter s rT—cam—cam-r—r 1 \I I I 1 1 \I I I I I \I 1 \I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 1 1 1 1 I I I 1 r l 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 \\\ 1 1 lii Beam Flexible Duct Bottom BoardIt Access Area Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 0091 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. r. Method 2: Gasketed Type through the rim joist 1n5/09 With a through -the -rim joist design, the duct in each floor section terminates at an opening in the marriage line rim joist. Fixed through -the -rim crossovers employing amarriagelinegasketsuchasinFigure52werecompletedinCompleteMulti -SectionSet, STEP 4. CHECK MARRIAGE LINE GASKET (p. 38) and require no additionalworkhere. 31. W 1. S (w i)raMaftvly. T,piwl e heNr, rRm ,,g Fur IAtlry the rim (wit X3SPFZ3md NerrgAN wM DU Ou W INe"I Fleur loft Typiol tr n= lost Under the rim joist In this configuration, flexible crossover ducts from adjoining sections pass through theflooranddipundertherimjoistatthemarriagelinewheretheyarejoined (Figure 53). Pull each pair of ducts through the openings provided in the bottom board, under the marriage line rim joist and connect them using the provided splicing collar and the pro- cedure for joining under floor flexible crossover ducts (p. 52) or the duct manufacturerinstructionsifprovided. 9:22 ne Uorporation (4-48 PG. 1) Figure 52. In -floor duct with gasket between halves. Figure 53. In -floor duct with flex duct crossover under the rim joist 0) r z rn 0 O X T O O z z CD i D r r D O z D z c D r 55 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O i= Q JJ H Cn Z Z O Q O a W O U W Y CC 3M to yt34 MaNgo2gual 1ryIX3r - --- NO— 1/15109 STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERScrossoverslocated in the wall(s) Multi -section homes may have one or more electrical and/or floor(s) along the marriage line(s). Use qualified electricians. JOINING WIRES Two types of connections may be present at these locations —snap connectors and All electrical work must be performed by a qualified junction boxes. Identify matching circuits if multiple circuits exist at a single crossoverConnectsnapconnectorsaccordingto electrician and comply with location. These will be coded for identification. the connector manufacturers installation instructions, including fastener requirements. the 2005 NEC. Disconnect power. Turn off Connect wires in junction boxes as follows (Figure 54): power to the home before Pull wires. Pull circuit wires into the junction box, sliding them through a romex con- making connections. nector and secure snugly. (Figure 54) Do not over -tighten. that holds the circuit wires together pro- Proper use of GFCI cir- cuits. Ensure Ground Fault 1. Strip wires. Remove the outer jacket viding a minimum of four inches of free wire in the box. Circuit Interrupted (GFCI) circuits are connected to 2. Connect wires. Connect wires together matching like colors, using appropri- ately sized wire nuts. Use the ground wire to ground the junction box and/or the ro er GFCI ted circuits from the power cover plate(s), if metal. Junction boxes may contain single or multiple 15 or supply. 20-amp circuits, or a single 240-volt appliance circuit. 3. Replace cover. Reposition the junction box cover and secure using machine Figure 54. Types of junction not sheet metal) screws. box wiring connections Comedee IY b& ApprovedPbt WH orN6bl Bar TY7-9 Black Grow d 0 Cbrtps PerType Bar Upd (rypi'y) ornd Lup tAeW Barso 0*) Sngle 15 or 20 AWP Circut Double 15 or 20 AWP culls Appo"d Co- b-. FLOOR CROSSOVER When making electrical connection(s) in the floor, use one of the wiring options de- scribed below: Method 1: Access panel 1. Access wires. Find the crossover location(s) and remove the access panel(s) if attached. If access panel openings are not provided, cut through bottom board to expose the wiring (Figure 55). 2. Route wires. Pass the wires through predrilled holes or notches in the rim joist or if there is a single bumped -out access panel as in Figure 56, then un- der the rim joists. If holes or notches have not been provided and there is nobumped -out access panel, drill maximum one -inch diameter hole(s) half -way up the rim joists on each home section, making sure the holes align and feed the wire through the hole. 3. Connect wires. Connect wires via a junction box or snap-connector(s) as de- scribed above. 4. Secure wires. Secure wires with staples to adjacent joists or studs within eight inches of junction box or snap-connector(s). 5. Install smash plates. For notched perimeter joists, install steel wire protec- tors (smash plates). 6. Seal bottom board. Replace insulation and re -install access panels and/or seal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose (may be pro- vided). The access panel(s) may be temporarily installed near the crossover Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) Red WMY Lug t.letsl Bares Orly) 240V Appliance alcu1 i yii Using snap connectors. Do not use oversized nails or drive nail heads into snap connectors. Some connec- tors are designed for one- time use only — a new con- nector must be used if they become separated. Protect cables. Cover all cables with conduit or other suitable weather -resistant and protective material. 9: PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Nqg Conformsi HUD MHC, location or shipped loose with the home. 1/I5/09 Junction Box or If Joists Are Notctled, Steel Protectors May Snap -Connector Be Provided With the Home 1 I I \ Ac esa Panel May1 ga Provided K NU Pmvi&d. Paldl Dutrn Bead.) Method 2: Junction box with conduit 1. Access boxes. If junction boxes are not exposed, access them inside the floor by cutting the bottom board or by removing the access panel(s). Removethejunctionboxcovers. 2. Connect wires. If wire is coiled inside one junction box, insert it into provided flexible conduit and pass it under the rim joists to the opposing box and make the connection as described above. If no coiled wire is provided, install pro- vided ship -loose conduit with wire making connections in both boxes (Figure57). 3. Cover boxes. Replace and secure covers on junction boxes. 4. Seal floor. Replace any displaced insulation and replace access panel or seal the bottom board with tape specially made for that purpose (may be provided). Variation to Method 2: A junction box may be installed only on one side with the other side containing conduit behind an access panel. Bring the conduit to other side and make one connection in the junction box. Junction Box (May Be Under orAlonpside Floor Jolst — WALL CROSSOVERS Connect electrical, phone, cable television, and stereo speaker wires in marriage wallsand/or partition and end walls. If access panels into the marriage walls are not provided, then the connection should have been made prior to bringing the home sections together. If access panels are provided in marriage, end or partition walls, remove the panels, join the wires as described above using the provided snap -connector, junction box, or at a receptacle, Am Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. Figure 55. Electrical cross- over floor wires with flush access panels Figure 56. Floor electrical crossover wires with bumped -out access panel Figure 57. Under the rim joist electrical crossover connection with conduit Avoid damaging crossover wires. Carefully fold mar- riage wall crossover wires so they stay within a single bay and are not sand - CAI r z m n O D O f O z Z D r r D q O z D z c D r 57 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q z Q z O F Q' JJ Q F- N z_ z O H Q O a W O 0 W z J Y fn 58 and re -attach the access panel (Figure 58 for marriage walls and Figure 59 for partitions and end walls). Connect wires at Junction Box, Receptacle, or Snap -Connector optimal Access - Panel STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING To ensure all metal parts are effectively grounded, electrically bond all chasses to- gether as follows (Figure 60): 1. Find lugs. Determine if solderless ground lugs are provided on the front or rear frame outriggers or headers. 2. Attach wire. If lugs are provided, uncoil the bonding wire (#8 minimum bare copper wire) from one side of the home and connect it to the lug provided on the opposing side using the provided paint penetrating star washer, tighten the set screw firmly on the wire and repeat for any additional home sections. Marriage Line 3. Attach strap. If ground lugs and copper wire are not provided, attach the pro- vided four -inch bonding strap to each pair of adjacent chasses with two #8 x 3/4" self -tapping metal screws (one screw each side). ne Corporation (4-48 PG. Conforms to HUD MHCS: 1/15/o9 wiched between studs when the sections are pulled together. Figure 58. Inside marriage wall crossover connection Figure 59. Inside partition or end wall electrical crossover connection Figure 60. Electrical bonding of multi -section homes 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. is to 1/15/09 STEP 4. CONNECT WATER LINES Connect water lines inside the floor through access panels or below the bottom boardasfollows: WATER LINES ACCESSED THROUGH PANELS 1. Remove panels. Remove access panels from each home section. 2. Remove caps. Remove shipping caps from ends of water lines. 3. Pull lines. Pull water lines through holes in rim joist. If holes are not provided, drill round holes in the center of the rim joist, with a maximum diameter of one third the rim joist depth (Figure 61). 4. Connect pipes. Connect threaded water lines using provided connector fit- tings (do not use lubricants or sealants). Connect non -threaded water lines using provided fittings and cement, inserting pipe to full depth of each fitting (ashortconnectorpipemaybeprovidedtobridgethegapbetweensections). 5. Test. Test connections for leaks. 6. Seal floor. Securely replace insulation and access panels. t+ar• t+at Ott ds. rar: • r: WATER LINES DROPPED BELOW BOTTOM BOARD 1. Remove caps. Remove protective shipping caps from ends of pipes and make sure pipe ends are clean and smooth. 2. Connect pipes. Connect threaded water lines using flexible pipe or a rigid connector line (if provided) and connector fittings (do not use lubricants or sealants). Connect non -threaded water lines, pipe, and elbows with cement provided, inserting pipe to full depth of each fitting (Figure 62). 3. Test. Test connections for leaks. 4. Protect pipes. Wrap water lines with insulation and bottom board shipped loose with home or otherwise protect to prevent freezing. Tape bottom board using tape specially made for that purpose (may be provided) and staple with 7/16" x 1/2" staples at four inches o.c. around bottom board using a divergent stitch) stapler or equivalent. If heat tape is used it must be listed for manufac- tured home use and be installed in compliance with manufacturer instructions. Supply Side Marriage Line Side With Water Fleeter) Receiving Side Direction of Row Cap to Be I Removed an Ste -iJ Protective Cap Water Line and Elbows Shipped Loose to be Added on Ste 9:22 4-48 1) V? YVIA Applying cement. Follow cement manufacturers in- structions with respect to application and drying time. Allow cement to fully cure before filling pipes with wa- ter. Figure 61. Waterline cross- over with access panels V? ? ZZA Choosing cement type. Use the proper cement for water lines as it may differ from the cement used for the DWV system. Figure 62. Waterline cross- over through bottom board to C r Z m ci O X v O f O Z Z rn D r r D O Z D Z C D r 59 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O H Q J J a H N Z Z O Q O a W O U Lu Z J Y M 1111111111i a Conforms toasHUDMHM 1/15/09 STEP 5. CONNECT DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES Vr&*#Z1ZA Complete portions of the drain, waste, and vent (DWV) system that are below the floor Providing required clear - as follows: ances. Provide the drain 1. Remove caps. Remove shipping covers from pipes extending through the outlet with a minimum bottom board; inspect pipes and fittings and clean them of dirt, obstructions, clearance of three inches in and burrs. any direction from all parts of the structure or any ap- 2. Assemble pipes. Using the drain schematic drawing provided with the home, purtenances and with not begin assembling the DWV system starting at the location farthest from the less than 18 inches unre- sewer/septic connection and working towards the outlet, fastening the pipe stricted clearance directly in with cement or adjustable screw -clamp connectors, if provided (Figure 63). front of the drain outlet. As the system is assembled, support the piping with temporary blocking. Provide any cleanouts with Unless otherwise noted on the schematic diagram, provide a minimum 1/4 a minimum clearance of 12 inch per foot slope towards the sewer/septic using a plumber's level. Where a inches directly in front of its slope of 1/4 inch per foot cannot be maintained, use a minimum slope of 118 opening. inch per foot and install of a full-size clean -out at the uppermost point of the run (Figure 64). Figure 63. Drain crossover Cement CoupkV Provided) to End d connection Pipes Support Straps Drain Ppe Fat•n Cmprog Direction of flow and Slope Drecdon of Flow and Slope RoMed) b Pq^7 Coupling Wdh Darya Connection Pipe Coupler Figure 64.DWV system Drain Pipe rain rain Dropout Dust Dropout ce ust CurerDropoSupportsCover E SJb ust Sanita —Long Turn t71 Cover Tee Sb SbDe Wye LongTumTeaWye __G lean-Out Plug Subsitute br8bow Double Ell ong Turn Ell and Provide a Full ong Turn 91 Size Clean Out When To Sewer/Septic Required) 3. Test. Conduct a two-part leakage test on the completed drainage system as follows: Part 1. With all fixtures connected, and all tub and shower drains plugged, fill the system with water to the rim of the toilet bowl through a higher fix- Choosing glues. Use only ture. Release all trapped air, replace tub and shower plugs, backfill fix- solvents and glues com- tures, and allow the system to stand at least 15 minutes. Check for leaks. patible with the pipe (ABS Drain the system. If leaks are found, repair and retest. or PVC). Follow manufac- Part 2. Plug all fixtures, sinks, showers, and tubs and fill with water. Re- turer s instructions. lease the water in all fixtures simultaneously to obtain the maximum pos- sible drain piping flow. As water is draining, check for leaks. If any are found, repair and retest. 4. Connect to outlet. Connect the main drain line to the site sewer/septic hook- up, using an approved elastomer coupling (Figure 65). Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. HUD MH 1/15/09 Examples of Connection Pipe l and Fittings (Not Supplied by the w Manufacturer) Support Strap at Maximum of 4 Feet on Center Cap and Chain Approved Site Sewer Hook Up 5. Install supports. Install permanent drain line supports at a distance of four feet o.c. or less (see Figure 63, Figure 65, and Figure 66). 2) 0.131•Diax3 }'Nails Mln. 20 Lumber 0.131' Dia x 3 k Nad — GaW. or Al n Ssip — Min.WLurnber — 2) 0.131'D12x3 }' Nals Into Floor Jast 2) 1 x 2• x 16G Staples a (2) 0.131' Dax 3 NoIs Each End 2) Staples a Sams Each Side Galv.or Alan Srip J 6. Insulate. Replace all insulation and make sure all potentially exposed portions of the DWV system are well insulated to protect against freezing. STEP 6. CONNECT GAS LINES The gas crossover connection may use quick disconnect fittings or threaded connec- tors. Find the connection location below the floor at the marriage line and gather the connectors (they may be shipped loose if not present under the home). For quick disconnect fittings (Figure 67), remove any dust caps and then with one hand, pull back on the quick disconnect device, snap it over the quick disconnect adap- tor and release it to complete the connection. For threaded connectors (Figure 68), remove the black cap and nipple (or any other Plugs, such as a black iron plug) from both the supply and receiving sides and screw the connector onto the supply and return pipes as necessary. Check for leaks before connecting to gas service (see Connect Utilities, STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE, p. 83). Q HIVI Corporation PG. 1) Figure 65. DWV connection to sewer/septic Figure 66. DWV pipe sup- port options Protect pipes from freez- ing. If the home is to be left unheated in cold weather, pour antifreeze solution into all drain traps, including sinks, tubs, and toilets. Be sure that the antifreeze is safe for the fixtures and P- traps. Installing quick disconnect fittings. Do not use tools, lubricants, or sealants with quick disconnect fittings. Gas test precautions. Do not connect to gas service until tests described in Connect Utilities have been successfully completed. 61 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q D z Q z O F- Q JJ a z z O Q O a O U W z J Y N 62 Ouidc4)iscomea Male Fitting Flex Factory Installed Delck-0600msd Femels Fitting Installed on Inlet Side Male Cap Fanals Cap Direction of Gas Flow shut-0If valve IreaNed on I Net Slde Flex connector Factory Installed Female Cap Or Male Cap Direction of Gas Flow STEP 7. CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING Install telephone and cable television wiring in accordance with the requirements of the LAHJ, the NEC, and NFPA No.70-2005. When making crossover connections or in- stalling telephone or cable television wires, do not run them in the same raceway as, or in close proximity to, high voltage electrical conductors or cables. Wires should only be installed by trained professionals. Skyline PG. 1 PF#os Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 67. Gas crossover with quick disconnect sittings Figure 68. Gas crossover with threaded connectors z Installing wiring. When in- stalling telephone and ca- ble television wires, do not damage electrical wires, plumbing lines, or ducts. Serious personal injury or death could result from damage to electrical wires. 9:22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Complete the Interior HUD1IS/ 09115/09This chapter covers the completion of the home's interior finishes including finishing walls, ceilings, flooring, trim, and mis- cellaneousitems. f,; , , r. ,, • ` y h'F,.., L' 'r. F'T t, .• ., i7.. . .r'LI ,x. "" f4t7 °i ,.r •k q, '-i,' C STEP;1t.ALIGN MARRIAGE WALL' S 63) : Lr.`i,[,. ,7:';7y", {{77 . rr• .•j'. ,,.-','•!.:.'•#i ct; 7' c,. -. Y'.'-n 4t - t.'".,C. ,k', ;- ,• .'i' • 'i(;'.'7-"_C .d-. -7._ C. ^i tl `• i'X. 1..1 r I:P}'1, ..' - - r. ,, ,;,. '`_F c•*_' „'i 47.E+^ fw-' _ f+;:• .1i . - -• 4,i.:^-a; a'' STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD .{'•1 1*, . fs 'i,.` Fla '' ;-'_ ;'_1(:'a 1" rF "` i , . : ^ + i 1 .+ r. ar" x4'';' " a; r ; :...:! :"3 ,' i '" . 1:' d. . 4,iT. '.l _ 1 ` I 'tr-, 7,T.. t,.. ,. ,lic tC•:••'Ir`•'.% t 'fc .7 ti. ,'. T- - i, , .`ri.-'•ri • rl j{•'`'+' +='"' . 3: COMPLETE W '.. ND-CEILINGFINIS STEP ALL -A, FINISHES '1 .. f 1 ' '}' 7r,' _,F,-r. "' r' 's'' 'w.-q _ •(.64)' Pi.•-. -•;`•;—.'_''t - •`r'i'="; ^ - I . r'-," :: CARPET P; 64)'. STEP,4.{COMPLETE j';wr,' ; 1; •, :,r `t; r, `^ r;` ,, ; iif r ti: ; I ` r- - _ • t.._ 4 , r 'r.''' - ',.;•,._, : r'a:.;t-,rlf . • - _ .,iir _ .-''•4, '":''.,; J1 •r ...;, , ''' : f•; .. c.:.' - a. l'ti .'•;, l STEP..15 COMPLETE TRIM (P 64)t :.,i. w., :,;x"- 1 's•;:. -' .,1f= :,,;-i'',. ::` STEP: C' INSTALL' SHIP LOOSE ITEMS( P'' csN.:_,, fir' Yiii2`- , 1Y. e;:'-,-.Cry_ I,,, y,• STEP 1. ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS Align and secure walls at marriage line openings as follows: 1. Align walls. Align walls and clamp in place. 2. Fasten walls. Secure clamped walls together with metal straps or long screws so they do not move when the clamps are removed. Insert wood wedges in gaps between walls, and glue and screw to create a tight connec- tion. 3. Fillgaps. Fill any remaining gaps with wood or sheathing material. STEP 2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD Finish all unfinished gypsum board walls and ceilings as follows: 1. Install panels. Install ship loose gypsum panels using a 1/4 inch diameter bead of adhesive on all framing members and minimum 1-1/2 inch long dry- wall screws, nails, or staples at six inches o.c. along panel edges and 12 inches o.c. in the field into framing members. 2. Mud seams. Mud and tape all seams and corners, filling all fastener depres- sions. Follow mud manufacturer's directions. 3. Paint. When the final coat of mud is dry, prime and paint all unfinished gyp- sum board tomatchexistingpaintcolorandfinishtexture. 9:22 Corporation ( PG. 1) Fastening gypsum. When attaching gypsum board, depress, but do not break the paper face with the fas- tener. Breaking the paper will weaken the connection. Using alternative materials. Obtain the home manufac- turer's approval before us- ing interior finish materials other than those provided with the home. 63 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O F- Q J J Q H N Z_ Z O H Q 1Y O a - at O L) W Z J Y W 64 STEP 3. COMPLETE WALL AND CEILING FINISHES Install interior ship loose wall and/or ceiling panels using a 1/4 inch diameter bead of polyvinyl acetate (PVA) adhesive on all framing members and fasten with minimum 1- 1/2 inch long staples or nails at six inches o.c. along panel edges and 12 inches o.c. in the field into framing members. STEP 4. COMPLETE CARPET Install and seam ship loose or rolled carpet as follows: 1. Prepare floor. Clean the floor of all dirt and debris and smooth the floor deck at the marriage line seams as necessary to ensure a level and smooth sur- face. 2. Lay pad. Lay down the carpet pad, if provided. 3. Stretch carpet. Ensuring all carpet "grain" runs in the same direction, fit and secure the carpet using a power carpet stretcher. Stretch the carpet up to the seam and tack it down temporarily until the carpet is seamed. 4. Butter carpet. "Butter" with carpet adhesive the edges of the carpet along the seam. 5. Seam carpet. Place heat bond tape under the seam with the glue side next to the carpet and apply heat from a seaming iron to the top of the seam, press- ing the carpet into the glue. 6. Keep scraps. Retain reasonable size carpet scraps to protect carpet and flooring during move -in. STEP 5. COMPLETE TRIM Using fine gauge wire staples or pin nails, install ship loose molding and wainscot pan- eling to finish trimming out ceilings, marriage line walls, front and rear end walls, and passageway doors where necessary. STEP 6. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ITEMS Remove all strapping, blocking, and packaging from appliances, windows, and doors. Install any drapes, mini -blinds, mirrors, door stops, closet shelves, and hardware per the product manufacturer's installation instructions. Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 Conforms to HUD M1IHCSS 1/15/09 V&r*IrZZj Installing carpet. Only ex- perienced carpet installers should install carpet. Fail- ure to follow the carpet manufacturer's directions may void the carpet war- ranty. Stagger seams. Stagger all seams. For ex- ample, locate the carpet pad seam three inches to left of marriage line and the carpet seam three inches to right of marriage line. 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. is to 1115109 Install Stabilizing Systems This chapter covers the design and installation of the stabilizing system which secures the home against lateral and upwardforcescausedbywind. The system covered here uses earth (or ground) anchors and steel straps connected to the home'slongitudinalsteelbeamsand/or exterior walls. Stabilizer plates may also be used to prevent the anchor head from movinglaterallyintheground. An anchor, strap, and stabilizer plate (if used) together are referred to as a tie -down. Anchors can also be mounted in concrete footings when there is enough concrete mass (weight) to resist the lateral andupwardforces. This type of system is not covered in this manual. DETERMIN.E LOCATIONS t r 6;' STEP 1: ANCHOR ) uF ', t r. 3 , 1 •' r .` •:.V, kl ..1. <ii:..'t'•% •n.. 'i ' Q. 'STEP 2 DETERMINE TIE ry `'. r:,S: •~ 4` 'i, -' 'i I, ''T ';+ DOWN CONFIGURATION M'i, .. l :aT3.CT+ANCHORS SELEEP, t ( p? sq. i'+rs,. '} L•. 'I s, tll,,, ' 7 , , i:^i -'' 4: INSTALL AN T•; j,'l. a;' STEP ; r,.f l;- j•?:= • nT f.•rvI t1':x . a • - 1Lh:• .i^yx, t, .K;•.,-11.5`!r tw.• '1-. :_y'• ` - t Ar` .F' .'i '`7' s' r 11 • "" Th i' I, NI3'v '''(i.•[i.lf/'..1'. - - _ .i -•i t•. .: 71 - STEP 5.rrINSTALL''STRAPS_(P.73). 1:' 4' _ .i.l w:'}•',}`• q;• r,:'t: o-.,.: i;r ', i• . z., -u ,. -, h',;tr F"Q_ STEP 6 TIGHTEN AND-` .-,.; STRAPS tit i 1. ,' t „ t._; i: :,r; i er:{ _ ,ADJUST (p. 76 '1' Z rr , ;, l;r ri4• `C, !.. ' nr: STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS Create a sketch of the home plan showing the exterior walls, marriage line(s) (if any) and frameI -beams (this will be similar to the base sketch created in Prepare Footings, page 18). See Table 19 for a list of anchor locations, types, and where they are required. Pages wheretherequirementsareprovidedarenotedinthelastcolumn. As each anchor location is determined, mark it on the sketch, noting important dimen- sionssuchasspacingbetweenanchors. When complete, this will be the home's tie - downplan (Figure 69 and Figure 70). TABLE 19. ANCHOR LOCOTI(In1 TVD=Q w• r Ut:-uuwn scraps io a ground anchor regardless of the wind zoneinwhichthehomeisplaced. 2' Install marriage line anchors prior to moving the home over the top of the anchor locations and thenreturntoSettheHomeorCompleteMulti -Section Set respectively. Figure 69 and Figure 70 illustrate typical anchor locations for a double -section home in WindZoneIandWindZonesIIandIIIrespectively. AIVI ne Corpo 1) Need for a stabilizing sys- tem. The manufactured home must be secured against the wind by the use of an anchor assembly or an alternative foundation system. Where site or other conditions prohibit the use of the manufac- turer' s instructions, a regis- tered engineer or regis- tered architect must design the stabilizing system. Flood and seismic forces. The stabilizing system re- quirements in this chapter do not consider flood or seismic loads and are not intended for use in flood or seismic hazard areas. In those areas retain a regis- tered engineer or regis- tered architect to design the stabilizing system. 65 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Marriage Line K Anchor Head I . — Strap Vertical Tie -down Frame Tie -down wall vertical tie -down. Extend strap to far I -Beam - — ----- / for Doublewide units with Endwall Tie -downs 5/12 Roof pitch. Sidewall vertical tie -down. Line SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHORS Use Tables 20, 21, and 22 to determine the spacing between anchors for Wind Zones I, II, and III, respectively. Spacing requirements will vary depending on the type of home single or multi -section), the slope of the roof, the width of the floor for each section, the sidewall height, I-beam spacing, and the height from the ground to the strap attachment point. Determine the values for the home. Using the table for the appropriate wind zone, determine the column and row that corresponds to the characteristics of the home. The value on the tables is the maximum distance between anchors. Keep in mind that side - wall frame tie -downs must be located no more than two feet from each end wall. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) is to 1/15/09 Figure 69. Typical anchor locations for a double - section home in Wind Zone 1 Figure 70. Typical anchor locations for a double - section home in Wind Zones 11 or Ill i , ZZ Maximum spacing re- quirements. The LAHJ may have anchor spacing requirements that super - cede the values provided in this manual. 1 /9/2009 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. TABLE 20. WIND ZONE I SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING 1/15/09 9:22 Up to 25' SY T. 48' to 67' a,-01 to 25"."; 51 -S 25" to 48' 8'-0" PE19600312 =-w v W. Up to 25" STATE OFT-0' AID25'to48"' 0 0 48' to 67* T-0' 9/ON ... j—,—,:- U - -,t - ,2, 5'R;`-;,;; J 25' to 4a " T: tegault T0 11:24:12 2 9.01.09 4w 6'6r_ r 3; .0--m Up to 25" 101-91 1 V-3' T-6* 6-6* 4 48* to 67' T-6- 6' -6* 6 V-00 4--6- 5.,. 4—;Yp to 25' g-` 8--T)hil' 7 V-0 25" to 48" 7'-6* tt-48, to'67.-."'• 41-6" Up to 25" W-01 57 tp 48'•6- 9- 48 3' Up to 25%,.; N-c-1, 7 76--- 9- 25' : 67 to 48* 6'-g' 6to3-,,.'48"lol67" Up to 25" 13'-9" 9. to -, - --7 8'-3" 73* 42 6--0- 0,4, 48* to 670 8-3* F-U 25* to 48' 7'-9- V-3" 5'-0* 4--3- r Up to 25' 12-3" 7-9* 6-9" 48" to 67' T-0" T-3' 4*-9" 4'-0* st U _pto2 25" to 48' 7*-0* 7'-6* 4'-9: 4'-0' 5" 14'-0* - 0 Up to 2 V-3" 7*-0' ........... .... ir 48" to 67' 91-0" 101-01 5'-6* 4' 4'-9" L%; 14`4 7a WN 25' to 48' 101-01 6--0- V-3- 48'1 067' 5 —7 Up to 25" W-3' IT-O' T-9" 6'-9' 9"3'; 9--, 4P...... 48" to 67* 91-01 V-3' 4-6' P4 UP'tb 25'. 13'-0'- 7-' v. -6 25* to 48* 91-91 V Corporation (4---48PG. 67 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Informs to 1D MRCS: 1/15/09 TABLE 21. WIND ZONE II SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING Up . _ 5••4•111111 i11r1!/// _." j _ •_i r- 'i.., M-A `( T. LFG. }. i. ,io48'._ i ...... , _ _. 'i yw. -- i;i1. .;ti •r. . (f 48' to 67' - NA 77Up1625 ??:'`°s?rS:?'(°a_ -... 7i:?a:...''':..._rNp`,, :.L:?_t... _ PE19600312 _ ._... T , 25' to 46' _ •, N.A. ..._._ Es•48'to6Tu :. to u:'-.r'3;i' 1 • N.0.°i '.'. 'ty c,; -0 ' STATE OF Q •:Y. Up to 25" - - ... __---_ :::rar j . +, .7 i j G\ a:i• 25' to 48- ,... .. ,5. S i.:.?.l?9ic:t',.. _.........'-2'cs.`NAiSS/ONALEN 48'to67', _. - NA 2009.01`.09 o25'•^" y.......a,..is"::_._::.....,...__u:a.:::::... NA %.•'.. 11:23:58-0$00' 25'to48' mr- •. +r..,.T:y:. ':^r-i ':l:., ili*Si + S°:: S i . Y. 5,-4• ::. ".• 7:. ... :.:;:: • •.L 48'to6T•. - ,.[:: _ :aMc:Y; ''%Se :'NA' - `g.. 'a. Up to 25' • • ? . ' S 4• ,..: 3ii; •. _., .. 6 4•.,., 1, sr ter+-,r.•, _ rY-" ''4^f._ S tS"`7wm..'./r'-,r.,n..-wj-±j t7..a -S.r.•.n .. _- SY 25.1048: Y ',t, .- NA,... -::8.=.y:.NA:raT;..•n_w_i7,:,'tl-_...:i:_. . r. 48'to67• DNA NA - $.. Upfti25'A _ ..,t - --r-'--"--"--- •--- t_.r',1r3=:1s5'-4':r.•ii.75:4,-0. • 1. - ri"!:.4-0•u vi'sr"r <'iie_"us:` - -M•- 25'to48• y.,...' 'C NA L 1 N.A.54.._,. i S N•:r,---^ :: ;r.is;r'N.A.' st ', Ott-::.., r.`: i.. y''i'^:;:v;•^'R'^.:iS"^ •i;So: r.. ;.f. xr-^ na' r•cr o....cwir_--r:rrltt:•r•_ c'5'-4.. i3:_a25_'to48 ...•._.,:i N't`.c_..'.::.,._.........%."__: C.iC7.ti::......1.5:....• ......1:L: 43'to67' .. l.- NA ,-' NA • • - 54 L:' 9 1 1.. F::L.• _ .,1t7 :,' - `5'i•, Y 1' C • "Up to 2S ......... , 'sip tiN aC...... ...... .....:. .__.._ ..iL?._,....._ . _ ..... ._ 64 25. 10 48" NA NA ra"r+.rv- .rra:n*+.:-,::aTm.nw. ..VL..>n;•.- r.i:ay,., .. rr [^r,r. _ .:-:.J:+ 71 SCY t..:. .ts$•.4,'•'n to rm - - - '_.. -- .;- ti.n:+r-•.en.r:-t,,;.l:' rgn•,q.,l.7 ,. , c': c y'•:{' a25'to48,;,...':i._..:is4.0t__;.i.iti:_.....^.=:,,:4':0"«...,,E::i:..::;;.:^ti_s:i,.iil:i.,,.r:.•:c:s,:..:.....N ..if.:'.. 48' l0 67*,,. NA "- NA . - 5,-4, 5`4 s 514'JF: is St' li °; 7 e l:ii ? tom t. a r. t.., , J :5•• :%tee 25" to 48' NA NA .. y,<,..-...-.._. a....,-.T.. o.' :ii i:NA`'i i:35;-17::i:i:ii;- "'i:Ei :r i:e'S. r,48' In 67.iieiS:a,? i. ix NJI_ .:ue:C'; Up to 25• 5'4- _ 5 r,,•...._., ,;. .. r....... -•t;;r::'srriai: i'p?'jT:jj i;,c_'.liif=.:::, au.•glry$.,..•:?« e+.25'to48'Szi=LTi S i2.-N'r`e...3..• i .t.u:•ii' e1::::i NJtix.:a._t:?3r!S`=.. •%.c__:.e.iiE:i ES: • e.:_:.?:. 48"to67' NA NA - r,... 5-4.. e. :, ,L ^:Ls ;p• ..'= 'tfl1T _ -•?C." :'r°' . Sc 5''. • =': •rti 25'to48' ^ - - NA v ' Np` .-, .• ._ 5..•-^o-...,,.,. rtu48-.to 8T;- s' 'r',::tjS.NA'e ::S•' _ - :NA:f>:; ..d;.;: sSrr;, an.. — _.; . " . u.,.::. _ . U to 25" W E i s.,.:r,. P rv. __; _• - r.crI --:TYl.fir r•'la.rr.;al,; n.•.r,ymrr, N-, . ix•;.::.:, r•, -rv-cr- e.: - ' S!1_ r s :. r• 5•..., : a 2S to 48' •i ' e :4'"p ,._Y.:.s. __.....,.._. e:i 4-0,;•..,.,.:..it«.u:.r. L:`.::;ism._:;:i:.t,::it<.::....,..3...,...•ri....:.iz 64 48' to 67' i - c'='•'.A7 `... r ...,I,n. • ,n .;: ;Q:•11•4.::,:..5"r•'.` +.,'cl. G. x:? :5y:. "i:•.. _,yu.., a..^/S,.i'ir":....,5•Aiwits. •.-,:_.:. ..ir p .,;:v}::.: a'%i':x•.,. :.;.12::_ •-n. _..1i i._7 fii._ u,b.,,1u:.'r"r.. A•••s•-i<---,L-.':L:.r. ..P 7...::.: •c:, T_"1 l;.isie:',,:.¢..=$'-4';::r, NA. rrrt.._...:.,u at.:•:. 7_ ; 48-to 67friC • '' . N.AY ::, lt,se s'. u : •.t..:•L: i ti• .-ii.. UPlo25' S-4' 5.4 tom,,. ,-, ; rc• 4 2S•lo 48 "i_ '' •''.i==.: .x• , 4-0''ir...._ i.-ii_...:i::e._._.._ .._._,..._..,.::ea...:._:...::i.^:._: 46" to 67" NA NA - 54' .. 25" to48' ..4-0' NA- 5_.4,._.. . i48' lo,6Tr,,...._ .,,. •, 'N1. - Y%% ; L7 .ai"NA°z,•: - ;,: - C 0 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Jr Conforms to HUD MRCS; 1/15/09 TABLE 22. WIND ZONE III SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHOR MAXIMUM SPACING 9:22 Up to 25' - 4'-0- I • 'P:^S7:• :"7 _ ••. _ \\\11111111111// / ,._....._. 2S.t048' •L: er; ci:•r ` a.::. "r \\ l: :%tir r. i'ii, \ t~Y T. LF / r.r NA Up 25' to 48' _ NA ` = 600312 c 1067' i. i`,a'_- -'S 4tii;se fir; N.A'"_ - • • ,.3;}-!?. 20' _ - o STATE OF 4r Up to gram- •: . - -:m r•t .. 4'-0-.% J . 90,'•../ND lyP. , \ : ;: 20to 18; -'s,', _ c--L-• :I r-n.- r., --'ii•:r' iii tCs ;.... 48" to 67• - NA /lllllllllllll\\\\ Ee' Up t025 N=O', " / •. 11 9.OL0 ..r•;; 25' to 48' N.A. A . ...,...._ _ ] 11:23i46-05'00' 48'to67'r:..... H_;w;...,.+...l.t.-,.: : NA.' .ar,"•;':c .•_-/+f'^r`.v gm..y.,......ti__J. r-258: to4 0, c' N NA NA4-04'_c F ' to NANA...__ _:", NA.; 2.. :i,x% :?1: r+z, .,p:cg;.- •a`-cr..l :^;:i r:-;rr.,__..,:•-rar: NA NA _ 4'-0' is 0625' ,... ; NA - NA. a--•, , , r 25'to48• .•. i;:. ..•i,.;,;.:w...,_....:a: Y:;:.:i: .. N.A. N.A. _ t.....w Nm4 Up to 25' 4•-0• 4•-0•. ' 25'to48' .. ..- :a NA:•.,, 'M.,C" ?NA:, * •-;': L r ^:; . 4 . " et•::a. it r 1.•. - rr ___._nr 'fl:, u-'`i 'V%,'wl-;i ru4 -0'. .`•2. 48' t0 67- r NA. ~ NA. _ 4.-0. Up to 25' "aii .., _ 4,-0,.x,._als.. ••y • -P 'ce;. 25" to 48• 2'f..... _..._.'aac;t•.'s N.A:: L:•a,: N.A.,4-0.',- 48' l0 6T. ` 'yNA:: . a:.:•L wN.gJ:YF° 1, . e;'i:a;•,.::::^:-;,:-^,'•..;;......, - F;. Up to 25' 4'-0' 4 25'to48'i';.V '.a.-Lr,;N.A.t .i -. -r.r-T NA7:i: :i.;..._Sr•r::r,;.rri fir:._;, 4, NA 4-0•`•• x......... w.._. ,., .... C; :_.... t,.....,..... ,^ .,....,,5...:..... .. ...... ,i_. . t.i..•.,.\ . Fir .,... 48'to67' NA. - - 4_ -0.,,%.,..:_.: Upto2S.. iu.., ro^- _. r--,..,.....:iz':...',..t'"`:.,^. 4'•0 25'to48' 11- N.A. NA c48'lo6Tr;;' c•NA:"i;v.s:i r3i:NA:••-L'ra'.•%::' w,,-`•• w.._::: ii:.,:r;--:.vi^,'i Upto25' 44 4-0' 4.0" , 4 -0'eR, s:ii? '"s •• 1. ,..., w ,..a;,. , ..>.r•t '..Yi`u`94%:1'i 1 •a,`?: • ._ n »Fi•%',..,,._''%1':.L:, [ r'^I:; ':''r s 4'.0 o " 4a;r•m.ur%.- e..l.rrx,G,u••.,.. i„c,-<•'i48' to 67' NA ry,p j:`ryUplo2S:•Ai i- • ,:r4-0•{,`i.ri'N 4a':3nr: 4'-0'.:iv7 7 - •:x.•7 Lo....::a.. `•:'a. .....4 ,a:P 25" to 48• ,. 1 •,. ';'x:' 1 .'„ • l;' y,:. .k,?'K±±:..:`., {.. . .:Lt"r TM c NA NA - 4-0 7.48• to 67•: Up to 25' 4'-0' 251048•iS _i rr iE 4.N I` - J - 4 °i: . NA`r A. ;-ti :i `°ei'-rj t^-%r 48• to 67 ^ Uplo25'..f_.;1., :4-0..1• :os l^• NA. a:-;_ - 4.0-,.. 25'to48' NA. {.• 48" to NA.';. NA ii:r ._ ::'a%'reu a.=:;:•. _..:.5?a:c'o-t.3:.- ,..,,: w"!SZ--SL-gr,cc•..: -.-.: ne Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 70 SIDEWALL VERTICAL ANCHORS' Homes designed for Wind Zones II and III also require vertical tie -downs along the side - walls. The vertical tie -down anchor straps (or brackets for connecting to the home) are factory installed and indicate the locations. Vertical and frame sidewall tie -downs may connect to one double -headed anchor or each to its own dedicated anchor. Any factory -installed sidewall tie -down straps must be connected to a ground anchor re- gardless of the wind zone in which the home is placed. END WALL FRAME ANCHORS End wall frame tie -downs are especially important for homes that are wider and have higher roof pitches because those features increase the surface area exposed to wind loads at the ends of the home. Use Table 23 to determine the number of end wall frame anchors required at the each end of each home section. End wall frame tie -downs are not required at Wind Zone I. PFS#°5 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15109 TABLE 23. END WALL FRAME ANCHORS REQUIRED PER HOME SECTION O H END OF THE HOME I 1 I1 U Nrr/J i W. g;: G1STE%gF., 4.35/12 2 4 _ 4 _ 4 ; 4 , PE19600312vow.-••y,, t, .•T-s AN.^ N A . _ 4.35/12 4 4 4 4_ 4 4, o STATE OF Q fa1N.A. 4.35/123N.A.N.A ••:4.N.Ar' ;n' .N:A: ;y.N.A:; :i 0.c oHDIAN •'• i ,-.... _ 3 ........ ,. 3 . .. 3 ,..-... 3, ... ... 4ccs, •..........•NG `\``. r - ter• ear.- nqr •'f?j::7u a ti ti".rjcrs : ee c r;.r Ee,e .4r i i `4/ONA1.E 5/ 12 at ,"-_'it4`'i•w`L'Sx3 ':.a.'r 3.:'._._....;.3 s_,'.s;_,e..54:r'%'::,:i•:ti:.`.c 4i.: ////lllllllll\\\ 3 4 J 3 4 4 Jeffrey T. Legault 4. 35/12 3 / 7( 2009. 01.09 r".•;' i;:cT_.c_:t+:"i4:i....:;r-'R i/17 di' - `, 411:23:28-05'00' 13 ,' '4;r MARRIAGE LINE VERTICAL ANCHORS In Wind Zones II and III, marriage line anchors are required along the marriage wall. In Wind Zone I marriage line anchors are sometimes required. (Figure 80) There may be manufacturer -installed brackets indicating required tie -down locations may be identified by tags or paint). If necessary to avoid interference with tie -downs, the marriage linepierlocationmaybeoffsethorizontallyfromthecolumnbyamaximumof6inches. TAG UNIT FRAME ANCHORS See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie -down requirements for tag units. TAG UNIT VERTICAL ANCHORS See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie -down requirements for tag units. PORCH POST ANCHORS At Wind Zone II or III install tie -down strap to a ground anchor through the factory in- stalled bracket. Install ground anchor and tie -down strap at each factory installed bracket. OFFSET UNIT ANCHORS See Addendum to these installation instructions for tie -down requirements for offset units. ne Corporation ( 4-48 PG. 1 When to install marriage line anchors. Anchors along the marriage line must be installed prior to the second half of a multi - section home being set. Setting the strap angle. When straps are con- nected only to the near (- beam, (Figure 71) the an- gle the strap makes with the ground should be be- tween 30 degrees and 60 degrees. Angles greater than 60 degrees may re- quire closer anchor spac- ing. PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. PF#os COn1O mS t0 _ HUD MHCSS 7% woo3119/09 STEP 2. DETERMINE TIE -DOWN CONFIGURATION There are two primary tie -down configurations: the near beam and the far beam meth- ods. Skyline Corporation use the near beam method for all Wind Zone I applications. The near beam method is also used at Wind Zones II and III, except when a unit has a 5 in 12 roof pitch, and then the far beam method is used. The two methods are describedbelow: Near Beam Method. Connect an anchor strap from the anchor head to the beam closest to the anchor. (Figure 71). In addition for Wind Zones II and II, connect a vertical sidewall strap from the sidewall of the home to the anchorheadusingadouble -headed anchor. Far Beam Method. Connect an anchor strap from the anchor head to the out- side beam. (Figure 71). In addition for Wind Zones II and Il, connect a vertical sidewall strap from the sidewall of the home to the anchor head using a double - headed anchor. The far beam method is only required for double wide units at Wind Zone II or III with a 5/12 roof pitch. Sidewall Vertical Tie -down Wind Zone II or III). NearEBeam Far I -Beam Ground Level Near Beam sidewall frame \ be -down Strap Angle - 30 to 60 degrees Far Beam sidewall frame be -down (5/12 Roof pplch units at Wind Zone II or III). Stabilizer pate Ground Anchor STEP 3. SELECT ANCHORS Use the torque probe results from Prepare the Site, STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL - BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE (p. 15) and the anchor manufacturer instruc- tions; select the type and length of anchor to use. The installed ground anchor sizelength) must be listed (i.e. approved) for the soil class. Make sure the anchor is of sufficient length such that the top of the helix is below the frost line. Select a shaft diameter sufficient to resist excessive torsion, "ring -off, (when the helix or anchor head separates from shaft) or shaft splitting. Consult the anchor sup- plier for guidance. Review all of STEP 3. INSTALL ANCHORS (p. 71) and STEP 4. INSTALL STRAPS (p. 72) before making final anchor selections to determine when single -headed vs. double - headed anchors should be used. Follow the specifications in Table 30 when selectingstabilizingsystemcomponents. 1:30:55 Skyline 1) Figure 71. Lateral tie -down configurations co r z rn n O a O D O Z z rn D r r O Z D Z C D r 71 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 72 Conforms to HUD MHCS: 1/15/09 TABLE 24. ANCHOR SYSTEM MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS of iric on'steel of not less than 0.30 oi-pe sq'ft ofs_urfarz coated Straps must be minimum 1-1/4" x 0.035" zinc -coated (0.30 oz per sq ft) steel strapping conforming toASTMD3953-97, Type 1, Grade 1, Finish B with a minimum allowable working load capacity of 3,150 Ibsandaminimumultimateloadof4,725 lbs. Slit or cut edges of zinc -coated strapping do not need to be zinc coated. STEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS Before beginning anchor installation, check for obstructions under the home such as piers and frame members that may interfere with the tie down strapping. Check with util- ity companies to determine the location of underground utilities, such as electrical andphonelines, and water, sewer, and gas pipes that may be buried in potential anchor lo- cations. Also check for homeowner -installed wires and pipes, such as those connecting exterior lighting or sheds to the home. These must also be avoided. FRAME ANCHORS Frame anchors can be installed in two ways, in -line and against a stabilizer plate. The two methods are discussed below: In -Line Configuration The in -line configuration (Figure 72) for homes can be used in Wind Zone I only. Typi- cally, in -line anchors are used under high homes where the anchors can be installedfromunderthehomeafterthehomeisset. In -line anchors can also be installed before the home is set, however, precisely aligning the anchor with the home both vertically and horizontally is difficult. Using swivel connectors for the strap to beam connection can provide some horizontal flexibility. To install in -line frame anchors, drive the anchor into the ground at an angle and location such that a straight line can be drawn from the tip of the anchor through the anchor head and to the connection point on the I-beam (Figure 73). Man Beam Sidewall Frame Town Strap Ground Mrhorwilh Slabifter Rate Stabilizer Plate Configuration Stabilizer plate configurations (Figure 73) are suitable for homes in all wind zones. An- chors may be installed after the home is set. A stabilizer device, typically an ABS or metal plate, is used to prevent the top of the anchor from slicing through the soil whentheloadisapplied. Stabilizer plates are available in a variety of widths. Choose the wid- est plate that can be driven into the soil to maximize resistance to movement. The LAHJ 4-48 PG. 1) Grading area around anchors. Anchor heads should not rest in sunken spots. Grade the ground so that water does not collect around anchor heads, but runs away from the anchor and out from under the home. Do not bury anchor heads. Figure 72. In -line anchor configuration Figure 73. Stabilizer plate configuration 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. M may have stabilizer plate requirements. Install anchors with stabilizer plates as follows: Locate anchor. Select a location for the anchor under the home but within six inches of the exterior wall (Figure 74). Aviod locations that will interfere with skirting. is Stabilizer plate 2. Install anchor. To assure that the anchor attachment point will end up at the stabilizer plate, start the anchor insertion approximately 12 inches back from from the desired location if using a 48 inch long anchor, or approximately 16inchesifusinga60inchlonganchor. Install the anchor at about 15 degrees off vertical, with the head tilted away from the home. Install the anchor to a depth of approximately one half its length. 3. Drive stabilizer plate. Drive the stabilizer plate into the ground to its full depth at the point determined in Step 1. 4. Complete anchor installation. Screw the anchor the rest of the way into theground. The finished anchor must be installed to its full depth. VERTICAL ANCHORS To install vertical anchors, screw the anchor into the ground directly under the strap at- tachment point on the home until the bottom of the anchor head is flush with the groundornomorethanoneinchabovegrade. STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS Follow the instructions below to connect straps from the home to sidewall frame, end wallframeandverticalanchors. Always protect straps at sharp corners including around I -beams with radius clips or other methods (Figure 75). Radius clips may be fabricated from 26ga (min) by 1 %-inch wide galvanized steel strap formed to fit around corners. Longitudal Bracket Protect Top and Bottom of Beam H-1--Beam N Strap Is Wrapped r- Around Beam 9:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 PFS#°5 Conforms to HUD MHCSs 1/15/09 Figure 74. Determining an- chor and stabilizer plate /o- cation Soil depression. Do not locate anchor heads in soil depressions where water may pool. Figure 75. Radius clips 73 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. SPLICING STRAPS Splicing may be required when a pre-cut strap is of insufficient length. Splices in tie -down straps are not permitted in a 'Y' configuration. Overlap straps by 12 inches, applying one splice clip from above and the other from below; use a crimping tool to tightly seal thespliceclips (Figure 76). Do not run any portion of the splice through an anchor head bolt. Apply Splice Clips In Direction of Arrows Strap Y Splice Approx. 12" Not NO Permitted SIDEWALL FRAME ANCHORS Install straps to sidewall frame anchors as follows: Connect strap to home. Connect one end of the strap to the home connection point using approved buckles or clips (swivel or hook clip preferred). 4 , 1OWrap strap aroundmain beam qlncbor no, r I ad x 0 Connect hook WOWmainbeamandconnect other end ofstrap ID anchor head. 2. Connect strap to anchor. Connect the other end of the strap to the split bolt in the anchor. Leave enough strap length to be able to make at least three, but no more than five complete turns around the bolt before it becomes tight (approxi- mately 2 1/2 inches per turn or 7 1/2 to 13 inches total). Fewer than three turns and the strap may not hold onto the bolt when force is applied. Conversely, more than five turns may not fit within the U-channel of the anchor head. Follow the procedure outlined in Figure 78. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 74 Conforms to HUD MCI 1115109 Figure 76. Tie -down strap splice Figure 77. Strap to beam connection i ' /, Strap to beam connection. Regardless of the strap supplier' s recommenda- tions, the strap must be connected to the top of the main beam to prevent damage to the structure. 9: 22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. MR FA OInsert the tension bolt into the 4 Place the strap through the slotted 5anchorheadandlooselyattachshankofthetensionboltandbendO Using a 15/16' socket or open and the hex nut up to 90'. wrench, rotate clockwise, wrapping the strap around the tensicnboft. OOnce tensioned to the point that 7 Once fully tensioned, align the If approved by the manufacturer, courderclockwiseresistance square neck of the bolt with the double head anchors may be used appears, use a 5Vopen end square recess in theanchorhead for both diagonal and vertical wrench to hold the square neck and tighten the hex nut. This will tie -down strap tensioning. Tension while repositioning the 15116' draw the two logetherandlock the the diagonal lie -down strap first tensioning wrench tocantinue system into final position. Follow Steps 3through 7toiustall tensioning. Repeal as required. straps to anchorhead. 3. Pretension anchor. For anchors with stabilizer plates, pretension the anchor by pulling it up to the stabilizer plate using the strap and take-up bolt to move the anchor head. Continue pulling the strap until the plate moves a small amount ( about 1/2 inch). This is called packing the plate and it will yield the strongest resistance (the bottom of the anchor head should be maximum 1/4 inch above the top of the stabilizer plate). END WALL FRAME ANCHORS Attach straps to the bracket welded by the manufacturer to the frame (Figure 79). If no brackets have been installed, use approved beam clamps designed specifically for this purpose, available from anchor suppliers. Connect straps to anchors following same pro- cedureasforsidewallframeanchors. I Pier I 9: 22 30 - 45 degrees\ Anchor with Stabilizer Plate Skyline Main Beam End Wall Tie - Down Strap PG. HUD MH 1/ 15/09 Figure 78. Procedure for connecting the strap to frame and anchor i // Anchor head location. As the anchor is pulled up to meet the stabilizer plate, the head of the anchor will rise. In its final position, the bottom of the anchor head should be no more than 1/ 4 inch above the top of the stabilizer plate. Figure 79. End wall frame anchor attachment method s to CAI A r Z m n O X O O Z Z rn I D r r O Z D Z c D r 75 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. N1 76 MARRIAGE LINE VERTICAL ANCHORS If vertical straps have been attached to the home. by the manufacturer, connect the otherendofthestrapstotheanchorheads. Factory installed marriage line uplift straps must be attached to anchoring equipment. The types of straps used are shown below. Figure 80) Type 1 is a strap used at Wind Zone I only. Some Wind Zone I units do not require marriage line vertical uplift tie -downs. These units will not have any of the strapsshownbelowfactoryinstalledandwillhavedoublemarriagelinewalls. Type 2 and 3 are used at Wind Zone II or III only. All Wind Zone II or III multi wide units require marriage line vertical tie -downs. uplift connector capacity Ty 3 k 7114 lbs. each to be resisted by anchoring Factory installed ct*ndard equipment. hurr',ano strap Gepadty Uplift connector capacity Is Type 1 Type 2 Is 3150lbs 1242 Ibs each to be resisted by anchoring equipment. 1/4' able thlmblo Incited in connector hot*. 7132' or 1/4' I / Standatd humane is galvanized steel Slot In strap Is for to be connected cable. Tension directly to an Par rnanufadurw humans Straphumans approved Ground Instructions anchor. STEP 6. TIGHTEN AND ADJUST STRAPS After all anchors have been installed and pre -tensioned, recheck all anchor straps to as- sure that they are tight and that the anchor shafts have remained in contact with the sta- s.nt- _I fn rin not nver-tension straDS. ne 1) Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 80. Marriage line ver- tical tie -downs PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Connect Utilities Conforms to HUD MHCSS 12116/09 This chapter contains procedures and requirements for the connection and testing of utility hook-ups. Responsibility formakingutilityconnectionsvariesbylocation. Consult the LAHJ and the utility before connecting the home to any utilities. 1 TA STEP 1:;CONNECT^ELECTRICAL_ SERVICE'(F iar.i.{{ ", aJ. ,gk}"ti ,'''_+'I Tyr r"y.. l',:.ft+:.Y', t: ;Y,-• 1 ru r Irk .. .. iti'- 1.. •'.+_. 0, STEP; 2.=CONNECT WATER SERVICE-•1( 80) i ®•!;STEP 3. CONNECT,GAS SERVICE (p: 83) pi STEP,Y4:'CONNECT OIL SERVICE4` r .(p.84),. yr, ._. r. r-. ,, • y.•-- - -.. 7. _ '; ,c [ 1 I. r . li,lrf' S J ']•r,l N ^ T .:: . i1t.15 i u i.: - 1. STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE The home is designed for connection to an electrical wiring system rated at 120/240 volt AC. All electrical field work must be done by a licensed electrician or other person ap- proved by the LAHJ. 50 AMP POWER SUPPLY CORD The power supply to a Skylne Corporation manufactured home may be by a listed 50AMPpowersupplycord. The power cord shall be permanently attaced to the distribution panel board or to a junction box. The listed 50 AMP power supply cord shall bear the fol- lowing marking: FOR USE WITH MOBILE HOMES — 50 AMPERES. FEEDER WIRE AND EQUIPMENT SIZES The current rating (in amperes) of the home can be found on the tag located on the out- side next to the feeder or service entrance, and on the electrical distribution panel. Usingthisinformation, determine the required feeder wire size from Table 25. These sizes are based on an ambient temperature of 86 degrees Fahrenheit and do not take voltage dropintoconsideration. Acceptable conductor types are: RHH, RHW, RHW-2, THHN, THHW, THW, THW2, THWN, THWN-2, XHHW, XHHW-2, SE, USE, and USE-2. TABLE 25. ELECTRICAL FEEDER WIRE AND EQUIPMENT SIZES FOR COPPER CONDUCTORS 53 PM Corpo 1) ezz Special precautions when installing electrical ser- vice. Installation of the electric power to the home can cause exposure to live electrical circuits. Exposure to live electrical circuits or improper grounding of the conductor in the panel board may result in severe shock or possible electro- cution. A qualified installer must make the connec- tions for the electric power. N X G r Z m 0 O X D O O Z Z i D r r D O Z D Z c D r 77 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 1 J Q D z Q z O Q JJ Q H to z z O i= Q O a O U W z J Y rn 78 FEEDER CONNECTIONS Feeder connections are made from above or from below the home as follows: From above — mast weatherhead feeder The routing, connection, and support of the service drop must meet local codes. Homes equipped this way contain all necessary conduits to the electrical distribution panel. However, the feeder conductors (not provided with the home) are installed on site. If the masthead is located above the roof overhang, allow a minimum clearance of eight feet above all roof points that the conductors pass over. There are two exceptions to this rule: 1) The vertical clearance may be reduced to three feet if the roof has a minimum slope of 4 in 12; and (2) The vertical clearance may be reduced to 18 inches if no more than four feet of service -drop conductors pass above the roof overhang, and if they terminate at a through -the -roof raceway or approved support. A minimum clearance must also be provided from the final grade to the service -drop conductors. This measurement may vary from 10 feet to 18 feet, depending on the types of traffic anticipated below the ser- vice drop (refer to the NEC). Unless impractical, locate service heads above the point of attachment of the service -drop conductors and make them rain -tight. If individual conduc- tors do not extend downward, form drip loops. From below — underside junction box feeder A section of conduit is factory installed through the floor cavity. Connect to that conduit with approved fittings and conduit (not provided with the home) to the point where the service entrance cable enters the crawl space. Install properly -sized service entrance conductors from the main power -supply to the panel board. Depending on the location of the main panelboard inside the home, or the point at which the service entrance conduc- tors enter the crawl space, a separate service disconnect may be required. Refer to Table 25 for the conductor and junction box requirements. The installer must provide the supply connection including the feeder conductors, junction box, and conduit connectors. Protect conductors emerging from the ground from a minimum of 18 inches below grade to eight feet above grade, or to the point of entrance to the home. The distance meas- ured from the top surface of a buried cable, conduit, or raceway to the finished grade must meet the minimum burial requirements outlined in the NEC. Use a moisture -proof bushing at the end of the conduit from which the buried cable emerges. GROUNDING The home must be properly grounded to protect the occupants. The only safe and ap- proved method of grounding the home is through an electrically -isolated grounding bar in the manufactured home distribution panel board. This grounds all non -current -carrying metal parts to the electrical system in the home at a single point. Each neutral conductor must be connected to the system grounding conductor on the the supply side of the main disconnect in accordance with Articles 250.24, 250.26, and 250.28 of the National Electrical Code, NFPA No. 70-2005. Where the meter base has a disconnect (typically when the meter is more than 6 feet from the service electric panel, although this may vary by LAHJ) the ground and neutral should be bonded at that disconnect and then grounded to the driven earth ground. Four wires will leave the service electric panel to the disconnect. Three wires will enter the disconnect from the meter base (refer to Figure 81). Where there is no disconnect on the meter base or between the meter base and service electric panel (typically when the meter is within 6 feet from the service electric panel, al- though this may vary by LAHJ), the main circuit breaker in the service electric panel be- comes the first disconnect. In this case, the neutral and ground are bonded in the service electric panel and connected to the driven earth ground from the service electric panel. Three wires lead between the meter base and the service electric panel (refer to Figure 82). Skyline 1) to 1/15/09 V&r1FZZA Power supply. A large enough power supply must be available at the site. An inadequate power supply may result in improper op- eration of and possible damage to motors and ap- pliances. It may also in- crease electricity costs. V&O#zrzd Grounding the electrical system. Do not provide electrical power until the grounding electrode is in- stalled and connected. When the meter base is not on the house never use the neutral conductor of the feeder cable as a ground wire. PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 1 Service Entry Main Pane (May Be Above Or Below Grad) Enclosure 2' CondultTo Equipment eutral Service Head Ground s Bar Bus Bar Meter By Utility Company Meterbase Ground From Meter Enclosure Dlscomecl nding StrapL-2' 2' Conduit t Installed Disconnect Grounding LugConduit Fused) To Chassis To Main To Grounding Rod Metallic Conduit Or Rtdngs To PaneBeEffectivelyGroudedToEquipmentGround ack -'HOT' TOA Or B Red -'HOT' To A Or B White To Neutral Bus Bar Ground To Equipment Ground Epupnea G—rwbusbar G—ftna Lug To OrmW To Grounding Ry Melaeo Condul C EIIecl/v1y Gru d G—rd Mah arol Senlu EntryEndosuo Abor Or below GO 4) 2'CondWl To Nwlnl SerNo Hud aua by Melereyuft Cenga y MelerEntloern eomha strap lrr led by rmnlull MaMattuer 2'mndutr To Main P.W oua -'NOT To A Or e Red -'NOT T. AOre WMe To NWnd ma by is to 1/15/09 In all cases, a grounding electrode conductor and a ground wire must be installed ac- cording to the following specifications: 1. Grounding wire to be per Table 25 provided by the manufacturer. If manufac- turer provides a minimum 1/2 inch EMT or conduit raceway, the #6 minimum bare copper wire is provided by the retailer for installation. 2. The clamp connecting the grounding wire to the electrode shall be suitable fordirectburialandlocatedflushorbelowgroundlevel. 3. Use a listed 5/8 inch diameter by eight foot long iron electrode or nonferrous rod of at least 1/2 inch diameter by eight feet long for grounding (larger sizes mayberequiredbytheLAHJduetosoilimpedence). 4. Drive the electrode to a depth of not less than eight feet so that at least eightfeetoftheelectrodeisincontactwiththesoil. 5. When rock is encountered, the electrode may be driven at an angle not to ex- ceed 45 degrees from vertical or buried in a trench that is at least 2-1/2 feetdeep. FIELD INSTALLED METER BASE When a meter base is installed in the field, Figure 83 and the following requirementsmustbeadheredto: Install the meter base according to the manufacturer's instructions. Use straps to support any conduit. Do not use the meter base equipment forsupport. Use exterior equipment and enclosures listed as weatherproof and entrance 9:22 A e Corporation (448 PG. Figure 81. Electrical feeder connection when meter has a disconnect installed (typi- cally more than 6 feet from service electric panel). Figure 82. Meter base wir- ing when there is no sepa- rate disconnect installed typically within 6 feet of ser- vice electric panel). 79 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. m conductors listed for wet locations. The grounding bar may be installed separate from the neutral bar for purposes of testing the electrical system. The grounding bar may be isolated during the electrical check and re -attached, after the tests are completed. Check with the local electrical utility to verify meter base requirements and loca- tions and distances for the main panel and meter box. The field installed meter base enclosure must tie installed in accordance with its listing. Fasten securely to exterior wall studs and provide for a weather -tight seal. Check the local code for any requirements regarding the location of the meter base. or Wae Enclosure Ur Spew een Metr iewe AridnorWel STEP 2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE CONNECTION To connect the home's water system to the water source, identify the water inlet located under the home (usually below the water heater compartment or utility room) and follow the procedure described below (refer to Figure 84): 1. Flush pipe. Flush field -installed water piping free of all debris prior to connec- tion to the home's water inlet. 2. Clean threads. Ensure that pipe threads are clean. 3. Install pressure -reducing valve. If the local water supply exceeds 80 psi in- stall a pressure -reducing valve. 4. Connect valve. Install a main shut-off valve between the water supply and the inlet on the home. Locate the riser for the shutoff valve underneath or adjacent to the home. Select a full flow gate or ball shutoff valve, or equivalent valve. To prevent the possibility of fresh water contamination install an anti -siphon valve on all field installed exterior faucets. ne Corporation (4-48 PG. 1 05 mforms to fDaffCM7 1/15109 Figure 83. Meter base clearances. Selecting heat tape. Use only pipe -heating cable tape) listed for manufac- tured homes, and install it in accordance with the ca- ble (tape) manufacturer in- stallation instructions. Maximum water pressure. The water system for the home was designed for a maximum inlet pressure of 80 psi. 22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Water Pipe Optional Hose Bib Not Suppled) Conned To T Here For Water System Test Locate Water Riser Underneath or — Adjacenl to Home Service Connection Not Suppled) Mandatory Shutoff Valve (Not Supplied) HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 5. Install water heater discharge drain. Inspect the drain opening on the water heater to ensure that it is clear of any obstruction. If the home is to be installed on a basement or enclosed crawlspace, install drain pipe connecting the dis- charge from the water heater temperature and pressure relief valve to the out- side or to a sump. 6. Install water heater drip pan drain. Assure that the drain for the water heater drip pan does not terminate under the home. Using the materials provided and the accompanying instructions run a drain line from the water heater drip pan through the floor to the exterior of the crawl space. Terminate the line between six and 24 inches above grade. (Figure 85). Make the termination point rodentproof. Exterior Install screen over end of pipe extension (not provided). 9:22 Water Heater (factory Installed) Floor CPVC or PVC pipe extension field installed). See note 2. Support pipe extension everyf-tr Water heater drip pan Joist CPVC or PVC water heater Bottom board drip pan over -flow drainage pipe ( factory Installed). See note 1. kyline Corporation ( PG. 1) Figure 84. Water system connection S e ' // Turning on Water Service. Do NOT turn on the water service to the home until the drain lines have been com- pleted and connected to the sewer system. Using check valves. Install a check valve on the water inlet to prevent water system drainage in the event of a loss of water pressure from the source. Such pressure loss could cause the water heater to drain, exposing the heating elements of electric water heaters causing them to fail. Figure 85. Water heater drip pan and drain Note 1. Water heater drip pan drain pipe has been fac- tory installed through the bottom board. A 90 degree elbow has been factory in- stalled to accept the pipe ex- tension. Note 2. Insert the CPVC or PVC drain pipe extension factory provided — field in- stalled) into the factory in- stalled 90 degree elbow. Be sure to provide'/4" per foot of slope to provide positive drainage. fn r z M n O X n, O O z z rn D r r O z D z c D r 81 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q D Z Q Z O H Q J J Q l— Z Z O i= Q O a tr O U W Z J Y 82 t 6 Jw Conforms to HUD MHCSS 7. Insulate. In areas subject to freezing temperatures, protect with insulation or heat tape valves and pressure reducers that are exposed to the out- 1/15/09 pipes, doors; and pipes in water heater compartments with non -insulated doors. Con- V&** /, nect heat tape to the electrical outlet under the home near the water supply inlet. Selecting heat tape. Use only pipe -heating cable tape) listed for manufac- tured homes, and install it TESTING After testing the electrical system and connecting the water lines check the water system in accordance with the ca- manufacturerble (tape) manufacturer in - for leaks using one of the procedures described below. Before testing, close all water stal tape)tion imanu ti faucets, spigots, and toilet -tank float valves. Testing water lines. Only Hydrostatic (preferred): use pneumatic (air) testing 1. Bypass water heater. Bypass the hot water heater by disconnecting the hot when hydrostatic testing is outlet and cold inlet water lines from the water heater and joining them together. not practical. Air under This will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect those involved in pressure is explosive. Ex - the test from possible injury. ercise extreme caution and 2. Fill water heater. Confirm that the water heater tank is full of water. notify all site personnel of protectivethetest. Wear protectivethe 3. Pressurize system. Connect a hydrostatic pump, valve, and gauge to the loca- et. and take preca- tion shown in Figure 84. Pressurize the system with water at 100 psi, and then tions to prevent impact isolate it from the pressure source. Bleed all air from the highest and farthest damage to the system points in the system. while the test is in pro- 4. Hold pressure. Monitor the pressure for at least 15 minutes. gress. Do not pneumati- 5. Fix leaks. If the pressure drops below 100 psi, locate and correct any leaks by cally test CPVC systems. cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or joints and installing new pipe or Pneumatically test Flow joints with couplings. Guard Gold systems only at low pressure levels (20 6. Repeat. Repeat the test until all leaks have been eliminated. psi or less). Pneumatic: Pressurizing water lines. 1. Bypass water heater. Bypass the hot water heater by disconnecting the hot When pressurizing the wa- outlet and cold inlet water lines from the water heater and joining them together. ter system, connect the This will protect the hot water tank from damage and protect those involved in pump to a location above a the test from possible injury. closed shut-off valve so as 2. Pressurize system. Connect an air pump and pressure gauge to the water not to introduce pressure into the municipal waterinlet, pressurize the system to 100 psi and isolate the pressure source from the system. supply. 3. Hold pressure. Monitor the pressure for least 15 minutes. If the pressure drops below 100 psi, locate any leaks by applying soapy water to the connections and looking for bubbles. 4. Fix leaks. Correct any leaks by cutting out and discarding bad pipe sections or joints and installing new pipe or joints with couplings. 5. Retest. Repeat the procedure until all leaks have been eliminated. 6. Restore connections. Reconnect the water heater and the water supply. FREEZE PROTECTION FOR UNOCCUPIED HOMES If the home is to be left unheated in cold weather, protect water lines from freezing as fol- lows: 1. Disconnect supply. Turn off the water supply and disconnect the water supply inlet. 2. Drain water heater. Turn off the water heater; if necessary, attach a hose to the valve to direct water away from under the home, open the drain valve and drain the tank completely. 3. Drain faucets. Open all faucets throughout the home (including the laundry area if plumbed, and any exterior faucets) and let them drain completely. 4. Drain toilets. Flush toilets and drain water tanks completely. 5. Close faucets. Close all water faucets with the exception of one. 6. Connect compressor. Connect a maximum of 30 psi air supply to the water inlet connection using a low pressure compressor. 7. Open faucets. With the air supply on the system, open one faucet at a time Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Y I throughout the home. 8. Disconnect compressor. After the entire system has been drained of all water, disconnect the air supply and close the water inlet valve. 9. Pour anti -freeze. Pour an antifreeze solution into all drain traps, including sinks, tubs, and toilets. Be sure that the antifreeze is safe for the fixtures and P- traps. STEP 3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE CONNECTION If the home uses natural or liquid petroleum gas (LPG, also known as propane) for water or space heating, cooking or other appliances, follow the procedure described below: 1. Inspect vents. Assure that all exhaust vents on gas -fired equipment are se- curely connected and that roof jacks and stacks have not come loose duringtransitandtheyareproperlyinstalled. 2. Review appliance instructions. Review each appliance manufacturer's in- structions before the home is connected to the gas supply. Most gas appliances are typically configured to operate on natural gas. If the gas supply will be LPG, consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions to determine what changes need to be made. For homes located above 3,000 feet, appliances may requireadifferentorifice. 3. Remove cap. Remove the protective cap from home inlet pipe and install a full flow shut-off valve at the supply inlet (Figure 86). 4. Install regulator. The gas piping system is designed for a pressure that is at least seven inches of water column (4 oz. per sq in or 0.25 psi) but not more than 14 inches of water column (8 oz. per sq in or 0.5 psi). If gas from any sup- ply source exceeds, or could exceed this pressure, install a regulator if requiredbytheLAHJ. 5. Connect supply. Using matching threaded fittings, connect the gas supply totheinletsideoftheshut-off valve. 6. Close valves. Close all valves at appliances prior to opening the main supplyvalve. Full Flow Shutoff Valve Required Supplied By Others) T Source of Gas Union (Supplied By Others) TESTING Test the gas piping system in the following two ways: 1) piping only and 2) entire system. Consult with the LAW for any additional testing or start-up requirements. Before testing is begun, the temperature of the ambient air and the piping should be ap- proximately the same. Conduct the tests when and where air temperatures will remainconstant. Piping only test (all appliances isolated) I. Isolate appliances. Isolate all appliances from the system by closing all appli- ance shut-off valves. 2. Attach gauge. Attach to the home's gas inlet a mercury manometer or slope ine Corporation (448 PG. F4#os Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Installing gas lines. Only qualified professionals may connect and test gas ser- vice. Figure 86. Gas service con- nection vlriyzz Fill gas water heaters. Be- fore lighting the pilot on a gas powered water heater, fill the tank with water. Fail- ure to do so could damage the water heater. W r z m n O X o O O Z z Cn D r r O Z D Z c D r 83 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q Z Q Z O F- Q J J a I— N Z Z O H a O a O U w Z J Y 84 gauge calibrated in increments of not more than 1/10 lb. 3. Pressurize system. Using an air compressor, pressurize the system with com- pressed air to three psi and isolate the pressure source from the system. 4. Monitor pressure. Monitor the pressure for at least 10 minutes. 5. Check for leaks. If pressure drops below three psi, check for leaks by applying a non -corrosive, ammonia -free gas leak detection fluid to the joints at all valves, appliance connections, and crossover connections (do not use dish washing de- tergents, soap, or other household chemicals). If bubbles form, tighten the con- nection and recheck. 6. Repair leaks. If leaks persist, replace defective pipes or fittings with sound ma- terial and retest. 7. Release pressure. Release pressure and open all appliance shut-off valves. 8. Rinse connections. Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to re- move leak detection fluid. Entire system test (with appliances) 1. Close appliances. Close all gas equipment controls and pilot light valves ac- cording to the individual gas equipment manufacturer's instructions. 2. Open valves. Assure that gas shut-off valves for all gas equipment are in the open position. 3. Attach gauge. Attach to the home's gas inlet a pressure gauge calibrated in ounces. 4. Pressurize system. Pressurize the system with compressed air to six to eight ounces (3/8 to 1/2 psi, or 10 to 14 inches of water column). 5. Check for leaks. Check for leaks as described above in step 4 of the Piping only test. Replace defective pipes or fittings with sound material and re -test. 6. Rinse connections. Thoroughly rinse all tested connections with water to re- move leak detection fluid. GAS APPLIANCE START-UP Open the shut-off valve for each appliance and adjust the burners according to the appli- ance manufacturer's instructions. Verify that the furnace and water heater thermostats are operating properly and set them to the desired temperatures. STEP 4. CONNECT OIL SERVICE Homes that are equipped with oil burning furnaces must have oil supply piping installed and tested on site by a qualified professional in accordance with NFPA 31, Standard for the Installation of Oil Burning Equipment, 2001 or the requirements of the LAHJ, which- ever is more stringent. The home manufacturer does not supply oil piping or tanks. OIL CONNECTION Consult the furnace manufacturer's instructions for proper pipe -sizing and installation procedures. Where piping is run through the bottom of the home, ensure all holes in the bottom board are sealed tight with foam, mastic, and/or tape specially made for that pur- pose and made rodent proof. When equipping the home with an oil storage tank, comply with the following: Install the pipe with a gradual slope toward the fill end or drain plug (if so equipped) to facilitate pumping or draining of water and sludge. Provide a readily accessible approved manual shut-off valve at the outlet, in- stalled to close against the supply. Equip the tank with an approved oil filter or strainer located downstream from the tank shut-off valve. Use a filter or strainer containing a sump with a drain to trap water. Equip under ground tanks with a filler neck extending one foot above grade and a minimum 1-1/4 inch diameter vent pipe extending at least two feet above grade. Locate the tank to be accessible for service and inspection, and safe from fire and other hazards. Skyline 1) Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 V d Testing oil tanks. All oil storage tank and piping in- stallations and tests must meet all applicable local regulations and should be made only by experienced, qualified personnel. l9/2009 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. If the tank is located inside a compartment of the home, provide ventilation at the bottom of the compartment to permit diffusion of vapors. If the tank is fixed to the home, provide for filling and draining from the outside. Insulate interior tanks from the structural members of the home. Provide tanks so installed with an outside fill and vent pipe and an approved liquid level gauge. Install tanks that feed vaporizing type oil furnaces so that oil flows by gravity. To achieve efficient gravity flow, make sure that the bottom of the tank is at least 18 inches above the furnace oil control level. Tanks for gun type oil furnaces (these furnaces include a fuel pump) may be in- stalled above or below ground. OIL SYSTEM TESTING Before operating the system, fill the tank to capacity with the fuel to be burned and visu- ally check all joints in the system for leakage. Replace (do not repair) parts that leak. a Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) VFW# 05 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15109 85 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 1 1/15/09 Prepare Appliances and Equipment This chapter provides instructions for installing and/or preparing appliances and other equipment. While the items below can be completed in any order, the last item, CONDUCT ELECTRICAL TEST, must be done last. 1 . ,.. . t'-';:.' ,:s`.i'•+-''-*.-t n.. . , - ._s,._,y. _ ; •:-.,.rir. Y'}i; `k "L,w' -:,•-.1•_,.t,,r_:''` F :.i.r! .••r "%1;, •,'•, '-i- -, ... F• r. fir,, r _ i' 't .-i 1{Y•' __ •Tf_ p=- .INSTALLh.AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT-PUMP,`(p 66),r' {' li. i - 1+"+ .c ' i ' at'. '{, +Y •' " 'F i. y•, ','tz ..,; •:].r ji"y:i 3N•1' 1 i r' +l,_' Mlr}' t .]= ti' ity ', ! ` l_r - - •-'jy t:`c.,.`c' lY TF:.r-- i, ,;-ry'k. ` :,.Ja-:!-4-. ts,. 7 j, ti '! 'Y_ . _ A tt-r.' .d+ •ri fi'2 .,.,, „ {x+ij!C. j,+ { ,. i - 1 , ,,`t..r6• i ' ' `", .[ ''-'7t'i, w1_ tl ..7 r' Nit. S1r :L++;` %r+ft?' :ti: r•.;_S'i'L i . ' • ,r Y L^'i '! j-J,... , •" a- 'PREPARE HEATING'SYSTEM:.(Pr87).''" u• t ' ,rr.^ '' i,"' A t'; ? f t' . _ } r'.' -.,"ill" -' j•,., F _:^i'-4s' ., 'y;y.._'t• s• 1.t ,i.i ''. r, - a `i1 !• _i i, Ui.+:-r : 'rr .. l: `iit s, INSTALL -REMOTE HEATING'AND COOLING EQUIPMENT 87 rlc - i.r :F`.-'Y .L ,ttT c*;:'. •l ,["i 'i',"`' `u - 6l _ u..tdkG^+r ti ;y Y'{.•"` ",{ _ ' PREPARE EPAREVENTILATION SYSTEM (p 88),! , . Y."} J!„,$ . 7 3ii ..1 #-• NI 1 },-,,J "t' 7: '+' 4r - ;t;-A 1, L. { } •`• s i,,.-. -- ., f.; ,..ri, •: H, ... - i?- i fi; • H . .. r .t' - '! :{j% ri"-x '%' r'—'i•=.,t ra- rr ` F , i+ .'-^_ - Nr: • t , ai®;= PREPARE FUEL=BURNING WATER HEATER 88 i i'' ''. 4r .,! .,' _ '' - .:jt} ,.[i'..C ,,11•c+i:a:t't• r-.-S :k+ f-+ Ji7 ii•'^'N^L y,ii,, 1 1f1,,: 'I i PREPARE CLOTHES.DRYER-(p': 89) r _ 3 . ( T' .t•}'< .: j, ,. µt}s i.l Ff,_ Jfj c:il+l rl,;: :'__y+' Jt:: iiT'- t,,,'it•1 rs'. " fi:l. - i 4- • y5, yr'-, L'„,;: r' . . . .;`, yc .'-,'. I Hi ;'-• ,,lu'' 4l}.... fin.' .'t '..i J.•,iij _ t:.i., -!_. f''F J '+ ..,.i•,,, i'; .L •r_'1_tf,.- J c.• , +' j * } i'.,tr' _ ; S 4l 61 c ' hi' -_ r : jii;' .1. [`]- i; ,.PREP, ARESMOKE=ALARMS;(p 90) d:,. ., "t r' i , i :;'.:,, , i:. _! 4 i PREPARE FIREPLACES ( p..90) f 1" ;t,'',_ • L. '•{ I. ` 'l t iyirl: 1'1i •a:' s_r , 1' ^i . _ - L.L','Y _. 'M „'... 1 y ft' ' 'r; P._ 1 i.s_+' •' r "}' ,ry'': ijis it C; t?„.+,1'',;.•;t 1 >' - i ;4•.. p' ri '.r r7 .:'ri '+ , Fij '_ '_ .' i• in ['':: Lx ..PREPARE KITCHENANDBATHAPPLIANCESJ,FIXTURES-(p.92) ji1 -I _ i l •; iQ' 'jk' '^,'- CIF `-i '*'1' i,csi :.-~_,I r`'' " tl. JI'i • • 1+ '.1F _ ,il ., '_ t;. r,.= 4 <Jr'•+'i ,.'' p• r •+,INSTALL. EXTERIORLIGHTING ?t'J?% 93.h Fiit,.,' .,:. .1 ,!`" ir r'iRr'3'. 'F'''. i ,.•1S 1`', tj: 1, ,, IT'1 - ':rl' •' ti _ ,k. a '' u _f••: _ -; +t L_ r. ,- •,1 .,, h,.-zl ir. II _I - _ +f-?'-: _ ^'--:` 1;:•' ;, I• •atli •r.1: ,`X , :. INSTALL{_CEILING;FANS AND LIGHTING 93 '= `_" t n ^µ .! tt"tt ..1 l'r; r,.ta .• a•' 1 •' T; t', f{_, s, ,,• L fL i TEST ELECTRICAL' SYSTEM'( O.,95) INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP (if applicable) Q CENTRAL UNITS r z Install split system or unitary central air conditioners and/or heat pumps as follows: a 1. Check suitability. Check the home's Comfort Cooling Certificate (may be in- Use listed appliances. All Z O eluded with the data plate) to confirm that the home is suitable for installation of central air. If so, note the air distribution system's rated duct capacity applicable appliances must be listed or certified by a 1= BTU/hr), any equipment sizing guidance provided by the manufacturer and nationally recognized test- information provided to calculate the home's heat gain. ing agency for the applica- tion for which the unit is in - 2. Select equipment. Select equipment with a rated heating capacity (BTU/hr) tended and installed in ac- z not exceeding the maximum indicated on the home's data plate and a rated cooling capacity sized in accordance with Chapter 28 of the 1997 ASHRAE cordance with the terms of Handbook of Fundamentals or ACCA Manual J, Residential Cooling Load, 8th its listing or certification. z p edition. Information needed to calculate the home's heat gain can be found on Properly sizing equipment. the home's comfort cooling certificate. Choose equipment with a min. circuit Oversized cooling equip - Q amperage (found on the equip. rating plate) no greater than the branch circuit ment can lower energy effi- rating of the exterior air conditioning receptacle (indicated on the adjacent ciency, reduce comfort, p L tag), if present. shorten equipment life, and may cause moisture O 3. Install A -coil. When installing a cooling A -coil in a down -flow furnace that in- including lems in thehome (including corporates a fresh air intake duct, position the duct in the furnace cavity ac- potentially damaging the Z cording tothefurnacemanufacturer's instructions (Figure 87). For electric down furnaces, trim the ventilation duct as needed to allow installation of home's structure). Sizing J Y flow the A - coil and secure the duct to the wall of the compartment or to the top of guidance is provided by the Manufactured Housing Re- rn Skyline Corporation ( 4- 48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AM 86 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Conforms to0-0-07HUD MHCS: 1/15/09 the A -coil. Do not restrict the flex duct opening; allow the duct insulation to contact the A -coil, or allow the duct to become kinked, restricted, or config- ured to form a trap. Trap whole House ventilation Flex Duct A -Col Furnace Cabinet Furnace PREPARE HEATING SYSTEM If the home does not contain a factory installed heating appliance, install a remote heating appliance according to INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT, p. 87. Prepare fuel -burning heating systems included with the home asfollows: 1. Inspect for damage. Inspect the furnace and report any damage to the home manufacturer. 2. High altitude. If the home is located more than 2,000 feet above sea level or as indicated in the furnace manufacturer's instructions, derate gas furnaces4% for each 1,000 feet above sea level. This work must be done by a qualifiedandinsomejurisdictions, licensed) technician. 3. Convert for LPG gas. If LPG gas (propane) will be used, convert the appli- ance from natural gas to LPG gas use. Conversion must be made by a quali- fied and (if required by the LAHJ) licensed technician. 4. Install intake air pipe. Consult the appliance manufacturer's instructions for maximum allowable pipe run length, requirements for air dampers, locations relative to expected snow levels (check with the LAHJ for expected snow lev- els), acceptable materials, pipe supports, and pipe termination requirements. 5. Install flue. For combustion appliances, install the flue roof cap and stack as- sembly as described in PREPARE FIREPLACES, Chimneys (p. 90). INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT Install remote units in compliance with all heating and cooling equipment requirementsinthischapteraboveandthefollowing: 1. Locate connections to the home. Find the manufacturer -installed connec- tors, labels, or tags under the home indicating the required connection pointsforsupplyandreturnair. If connectors are not provided nor location indicated, select a supply duct location such that there are approximately equal numbers of supply registers forward and rear of the connection point. Locate the returnductinthecenterofthehome. 2. Install ducts. Install the appropriate supply and return ducts (not provided) between the remote unit and the home (Figure 89), making connections ac- cording to the instructions for crossover ducts in Crossover Connections (p. 52). 3. Install dampers. If installing a remote cooling unit in a home with a factory in- 1:22 AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) search Alliance Cooling Equipment Sizing Guide- lines available at www.mhrahome.ora. Figure 87. Whole house ventilation flex duct in an electric down -flow furnace. From left to right: as pre- pared in the factory,* proper installation with A -coil,• im- proper installation with A -coil Selecting A -coils. Use only A -coil units compatible and listed for use with the fur- nace in the home and in- stalled in accordance with the furnace manufacturer's instructions. Installing flue stacks with a hinged roof. If flue stack components are installed above the finish roof line as is often the case with hinged roofs), an Alterna- tive Construction letter is normally required along with a follow-up inspection. Contact the factory for guidance. Venting appliances to the outside. Vent to the exte- rior of the home all com- bustion appliances except ranges and ovens. Selecting ducts. Exterior ductwork for remote units must be provided by the in- staller or HVAC contractor. Ducts must be approved for exterior installation and should be wrapped with in- sulation of at least R-4 un- der a vapor barrier with a perm rating of not greater than one. (For ENERGY STAR homes, the R-value must be at least that speci- fied on the manufacturer's ENERGY STAR Site Instal- lation Checklist —generally a minimum of R-6 or R-8.) 87 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. t .) J Q Z Q Z O H Q JJ Q Z Z O t= Q O IL O CU w Z J Y rn stalled furnace, install dampers between the furnace and the home's air duct system, and between the remote unit and the home's air duct system to pre- vent warm air in heating mode from escaping to the remote cooling unit and vice versa. Home 4. Connect wiring. Install a thermostat containing a fan switch. Connect utilities in accordance with all manufacturer's instructions and local codes. 5. Seal penetrations. Repair or replace all floor insulation disturbed during the duct installation and seal holes in the bottom board using foam, mastic, or tape specially made for that purpose. Air Conditioning or Heating Equipment Supply Marriage supply Return Duct -1 III Line Duct l Duct 7 u Support Straps at _/ uppon wont 48' in. O.C. MinimumMinimum Clearance Between Ducts and Ground to be 4 in. PREPARE VENTILATION SYSTEM Prepare the whole -house ventilation system according to the ventilation system manu- facturer's instructions. Confirm that any fresh air intake ducts extend to the exterior and do not draw air from the crawlspace under the home. Do not allow any fresh air ventila- tion intake ducts to become kinked or restricted, forming a trap (Figure 89). PREPARE FUEL -BURNING WATER HEATER The water heater discharge and drip pan drains should have been installed in Connect Utilities (p. 77). In homes with direct -vent water heaters (that utilize gas, oil, or other combustion fuel), and where the water heater is not independently vented to the exterior through a grilled opening, provide combustion air from under the floor using pipe and cement acceptabletotheappliancemanufacturerorthroughtheroofviaadouble -walled flue pipe. If pro- vided through the floor, run the air piping to the exterior of the home, with supports Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG 88 t! Informs to ID MHCSS 1/15109 Figure 88. Remote unit damper locations Figure 89. Ducts connecting exterior heating and/or cool- ing equipment to the home V&*#Z,ZJ Choosing pipe lengths. The appliance manufac- turer may designate the length of the pipe run based on the pipe diameter and the number of turns in the pipe run. 19/2009 9:22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. PCSF#05 Ar Conforms to 1/15/09 spaced every 3-1/2 feet o.c. or less. Terminate the pipe facing downward a minimum of 12 inches above the ground surface and provide a screen on the pipe vent cap. PREPARE CLOTHES DRYER DRYER VENTS If the home includes a clothes dryer, the components for ventilating the dryer are in- cluded with the home (but not necessarily installed) and a vent opening has been roughed in either in the wall or floor. (If a dryer is not installed, seal all dryer vent open- ings). Run the dryer vent to the outside through the exterior wall or through the floor to a pointbeyondtheperimeterofthehome, using materials approved by the clothes dryer manufacturer (see Figure 90). Vent Below Floor wan Vent Through Exterior Wall NWith Clampb Duct Vent Cap —\,-A _ /--Rigid or Flex Duct to Dryer Cap Clampb Seal Botkm Vent Cap Board Elbow With Dryer Vent Rigid Duct Cap ^---- - . — rugio or Flex Duct Wood Frame Secured b Bottom of RimPlateor Install Through Skirting Install the vent as follows: Clamp to Dryer 1. Remove temporary caps. Remove any temporary seals and duct caps from the vent rough openings. 2. Install ductwork. Install ductwork using clamps (do not use screws or other fasteners that penetrate into the duct) and support the duct with metal straps connected to the floor joists or chassis at two feet D.C. or less. Ensure duct connections are internally overlapped to prevent inhibiting the flow of air and thereby causing lint accumulation. 3. Install cap and damper. Install an approved dryer vent cap with damper on the exterior termination of the duct. If the vent terminates at skirting, secure the cap to framing or skirting with sheet metal screws and seal edges with caulk or sealant. If the vent terminates through a wall, apply a bead of sealant to the back of the cap around the opening and secure with sheet metal screws to metal, hardboard or fiber cement siding or with wood screws to a mountblockforvinylsiding. 4. Seal opening. Seal openings inside and outside of the home including at thefloor, interior walls, siding and skirting (with caulk), and at the bottom board using foam, mastic and/or tape specially made for that purpose. GAS DRYERS If the home was not fitted for a gas dryer, installing one requires substantial alteration to the home. Gas supply piping and adequate venting must be provided as specified bythedryermanufacturerandinstalledbyatrainedprofessional. Do not cut major struc- tural elements to accommodate a gas dryer. AM kyline Corporation (4-48 PG. Venting exhaust systems. Exhaust vents must extend to the home's exterior through skirting. Termina- tion of the dryer exhaust underneath the home can cause condensation and moisture damage to the home. Lint and dust accu- mulation can ignite, causing a fire. The exhaust system must not contain reverse slope. Figure 90. Clothes dryer ventilation ductwork through floor (left) or exterior wall right) e ! ss Avoid damaging structural elements. Do not cut or otherwise damage struc- tural elements such as floor joists or wall studs for the installation of the dryer ex- haust system. Gas. Ventilation components that may be included with the home for an electric dryer may not be accept- able for gas dryers. Consult the gas dryer manufacturer instructions. Installing ducts. Keep ductwork straight and smooth as possible without excess slack. Slope it slightly downward towards the exterior to facilitate In X r z rn n O X O D d O z z D r r D O z D z c D r PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. I o] HUD MH 1/15/09 PREPARE SMOKE ALARMS The home has several factory installed smoke alarms that are wired to a 120-volt cir- cuit. If the home was designed for placement on a basement, an additional alarm is provided for installation at a pre -wired location under the home. Connect the basement smoke alarm and test all alarms as follows: 1. Check circuit. Ensure that electrical power to the home is activated and that the smoke alarm circuit is on. 2. Remove batteries. Make sure backup batteries (if any) are removed from all smoke alarms. 3. Test alarms. Press the test button on each alarm sequentially. All alarms should sound simultaneously when the test button on any one smoke alarm is pressed. Replace (with the same brand as those installed elsewhere in the home) any alarms that do not sound and retest. 4. Replace batteries. After successful test, replace the backup batteries, dis- carding the protective tabs. PREPARE FIREPLACES Install chimneys, chimney flashing and roofing, fireplace combustion air inlets, and hearths according to the manufacturer's instructions and the procedures described be- low. CHIMNEYS Fireplace and wood stoves may require on -site installation of additional sections of ap- proved chimney pipe, a spark arrestor, and a rain cap assembly. Follow the manufac- turers instructions and the procedures described below: 1. Remove coverings. Remove protective materials covering the roof flashing and any foreign material from the installed part of the chimney. 2. Install chimney pipe. Assemble and seal the chimney per the fireplace or wood stove manufacturers installation instructions and if there is a conflict be- tween the instructions and the figure, follow the instructions. To assure suffi- cient draft for proper operation, extend the chimney at least three feet above the highest point where it penetrates the roof and at least two feet higher than any surface within 10 feet of the chimney (Figure 92). Use additional sec- tion(s) of chimney pipe (not provided) if required by local code or if the site has obstructions within 10 feet of the chimney. n (4-48 PG. 1) moisture drainage. AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. PFt#t,5 Conforms to HUD MHCSS I Roof Top Asa— 1115/09 AEo. f Less Than VT M ' Min. 3. Install shingles. Install shingles up to the edge of the flue cut-out in the roof deck. Secure shingles installed under the roof flashing with asphalt cement. 4. Install flashing. Place flashing over pipe section and shingles and set in as- phalt cement. Secure flashing to roof deck at top two corners with roofingnails. 5. Complete shingles. Cut shingles in successive courses to fit around the pipeandembedtheminasphaltcementwheretheyoverlaptheflashing. Secure shingles with roofing nails through flashing and apply asphalt cement over nail heads. The completed installation should appear as shown in Figure 93, with the lower part of the flange overlapping the lower shingles and the side and upper shingles overlapping the flange. Figure 91. Chimney and combustion air intake duct installation VI? VZJ Selecting the appropriate flue. Wood fireplaces use larger diameter flues than gas fireplaces. Make sure flue matches the appliance type. Gas fireplaces cannot burn wood because the flue is too small and smoke will back up into the home. If wood fireplaces are con- verted to gas the flue will be too large resulting in ex- cessive heat loss through the chimney. Figure 92. Chimney clear- ance CIO A r z M n O X O i O z z Cn D r r D O z D z c D r ZZ AM Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 91 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. k J Q M z Q z O F- Q J J Q H rn z z O H Q O a W O Q w z J Y N 92 Ar i Conforms to HUD MHCSS -- 1/15109 Figure 93. Roof flashing and Ptah Dom, Upper and Side shingle installation around Ro* n9eA fShilShingles Overlap chimney y Csulkiq lange and Are Set In FlsphaR Cement Flange Slorm Cola FlashgFlue ower Part of Flange Trim wdh Sheri Meal overlaps Lower Shingle Sheers If Drfial To Make Flashing lay Flat On Rod COMBUSTION AIR INLETS Combustion air inlets provide combustion air through the floor or an exterior wall to a combustion appliance. If through an exterior wall, site installation is not required. If i ' through the floor, extend the duct from its point just below the floor to the outside (addi- Installing combustion air tional duct material required for this may or may not be provided with the home). Lo- inlets. Do not install the cate the inlet damper above expected snow levels (contact the LAW for snow levels). combustion air inlet such Follow the fireplace manufacturer's instructions (typically in the fireplace/stove or with that material from the hearth can drop beneath the chimney parts). the home. HEARTHS If shipped loose, install the fireplace hearth according to the fireplace manufacturer's instructions. PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES / FIXTURES Install kitchen and bath appliances according to the manufacturers instructions and the procedures described for each appliance below. Installing exhaust ducts. COOKING APPLIANCES If the home is provided with a range, cook top and/or grill containing its own exhaust Route exhaust ducts so they do not terminate be - system that penetrates the floor, complete the exhaust system as follows: neath the home. 1. Remove covers. Remove the cover on the factory -installed exhaust pipe pro- truding from beneath the floor near the appliance. 2. Install termination fitting. Secure the provided termination fitting at the outside edge of the floor. 3. Install duct. Use the provided flexible metallic duct to connect the elbow pro- truding from the floor and the termination fitting. Refer to the manufacturer's installation instructions for guidance on supporting the duct and making the connections. SITE - INSTALLED GAS APPLIANCES Install only appliances with a Btu capacity equivalent to or less than the capacity of the factory - installed piping and at the location of a factory -installed gas riser. REFRIGERATOR Prepare the refrigerator as follows: Remove straps, blocks, or other securement devices used for shipping and patch any resulting marks on floors or walls. If the refrigerator has an icemaker, check water lines for leaks upon installa- tion and a few days later to make sure no leaks have developed. SITE - INSTALLED APPLIANCES AND FIXTURES If sinks, tubs, showers or other fixtures or appliances are to be site -installed, follow the manufacturer' s installation instructions. Use only products listed for use in manufac- tured homes and follow all applicable local codes. Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 AN PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 1111 At 05PAAr0 Conforms to s+ HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 INSTALL EXTERIOR LIGHTING Install exterior lighting according to Figure 94 and the following: 1. Remove cover. Remove the screws and cover from electrical junction box. 2. Install flash ring. Place the non-combustible flash ring over the junction box. 3. Connect wires. Connect fixture wires to house wires in the box, black to black, white to white, and equipment ground to equipment ground, using listedwireconnectors. Push wires into the box. 4. Connect fixtures. Connect the fixture to the junction box or strap usingscrewsprovidedwiththelightfixture. 5. Weatherproof. Weatherproof/caulk around the base of the fixture, leaving a small gap in the caulking on the bottom to permit drainage of water that mayaccumulate. 6. Complete installation. Install bulb and globe on the fixture and verify properoperation. Wire From SN" d Requhq Fixture Crcy Globe Wire From NLL Swlth — Pigtail for Ground Corhq, wire Junction Bm J Wire to Oeror Fiore INSTALL CEILING FANS/LIGHTS Install ceiling fans with the trailing edges of the blades at least six feet -four inches above the finished floor. Comply with all unit manufacturers' instructions and the re- quirements below. Electrical boxes for use with ceiling fans have a maximum allowed weight (usually 35 — 50 Ibs). This is stamped inside the box. Check the maximum weight of the fan versus the allowable weight for the electrical box before installing thefan. CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED TO FACTORY -INSTALLED ELECTRICAL BOXINCEILING Before installing the unit, make sure that adequate structural bracing is present in the ceiling. If uncertain, check with the manufacturer. Follow the fan or light manufacturer's instructions to connect the unit and complete the wiring. If the instructions are not available, connect the wiring as shown in Figure 95. 9:22 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) Lighting installation. A qualified electrician should install lighting. Before con- necting lighting, disconnect power to the lighting circuit. Ground all exterior light fix- tures. Using a non-combustible ring. Install a non- combustible ring completely covering any combustible surfaces the fixture may be mounted on (e.g. hard- board, clad wood and vinyl siding), or when ceiling ma- terial is exposed between the light fixture canopy and the junction box. Figure 94. Exterior lighting connection V sezz Installing ceiling fans. A qualified electrician should install lighting and fans. Be- fore connecting the ceiling fan or light, disconnect Power to the fan wires. Any unit installed outside of the home (such as in a porch ceiling) shall be listed for wet locations. to G r z M n O X a O D O z z D r r D f O z D z c D r 93 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. a" C• J Q z a z 0 i= a JJ Q fn z_ z 0 H Q 0 a fW 0 0 W z J Y fn 94 O HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Ground Win Color Ca Wires Win Nut Ceiling B NoncombusbNe Ring (If Requ'vW) CEILING FAN/LIGHT MOUNTED ON SITE -INSTALLED DECORATIVE BEAM Where the electrical box will be mounted in a site -installed decorative center beam at- tached to the ridge beam, connect the fixture as follows (see Figure 96): 1. Cut hole. If the decorative beam (shipped loose) does not contain a precut hole for the electrical box, cut a hole with a diameter approximately 1/4 inch larger than the box's using a hole saw. Align the hole with the supply wire lo- cation and center on the beam. 2. Install box. Install the box in the hole and secure the flange (plastic boxes only) to the decorative beam with four #6 x 1" screws. 3. Insert wire. Insert the ceiling wire through a knock -out hole in the side of the electrical box. It may be necessary to cut a notch in the top of the decorative beam (on the supply wire side of the center beam hole) allowing the supply wire to be inserted into the electrical box without binding against the beam during installation. Leave approximately four inches of wire free in the box. 4. Attach beam. Secure the decorative beam in place over the center line joint, checking that the supply wire is not pinched or penetrated by beam fasteners. Secure the electrical box to the ridge beam with #8 x 2 1/2" wood screws through the two holes in the top of the box. 5. Strip wires. Strip about 3/4 inch of insulation from the white and black con- ductor ends of the supply wire. 6. Position ring. Position the non-combustible flash ring (provided) over the electrical box so that the finished surface (adjacent to electrical box) which is to be covered by the fan canopy is not exposed. 7. Install and wire unit. Follow the unit manufacturer's installation instructions for mounting the fan/light assembly to the box and for electrical wiring. Use provided electrical connectors for splicing wire. Beam Center Beam -Shipped Loose Celli for for Field Installafion Supply Wire Celled Md _J I I Hole for Box Cut Through 2x6 Secured for Shipment (May Be Cut in Plant orinFeld) Notch Beam at Hole H Necessary forwireChase Secure Box to Ridge Beam field installed) Secure Box to 2x6Center Beam (field -installed) Electrical Box Skyline Wire InsertedinFdd h Side KnockoulorBox PG. 1 Figure 95. Wiring for a ceil- ing fan or chain -hung light fixture. Choosing ceiling fan junc- tion boxes. Connect ceil- ing fans only to junction boxes listed and marked for ceiling fan application in accordance with Article 314.27(b) of 2005 NEC. Always ground metal junc- tion boxes. Selecting fan weight. Do not use any ceiling fans or light fixtures that exceed the weight rating of the box 35 Ibs unless otherwise noted). Grounding electrical de- vices. Ground fans/lights using a fixture -grounding device or a fixture - grounding wire as specified in the manufacturers in- structions. Figure 96. Ceiling fan/light mounted to Bush ridge beam 9:22 AM PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 1 a TEST ELECTRICAL SYSTEM After completion of all electrical wiring and connections, including crossovers, appli- ances, lights, and ceiling fans, inspect and test the electrical system as follows: 1. Fill water heater. Fill water heater before turning on power to the home or switching on the circuit breaker. 2. Test continuity. Before turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct an electrical continuity test to ensure that exposed metallic parts of the homeandthechassisareeffectivelybonded. 3. Test operation. After turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct operational tests of all devices (except water heaters, electric ranges, electric furnaces, dishwashers, clothes washers/dryers, and portable appliances) to demonstrate that they are connected and in working order. 4. Test polarity. After turning on the electrical power to the home, conduct elec- trical polarity checks to determine that connections of electrical equipment in- stalled or completed during installation have been made properly. Visual veri- fication is an acceptable electrical polarity check. 0 AM Corporation (4-48 PG. V9#0e nforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Cn X G r z rn n O X O D I O z z rn D r r D O z 3 D z c D r P PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. k & e I HUD MHCSS 1/35109 Complete Exterior Work This chapter covers sealing the bottom board, installing the ground cover and skirting, preparing wind protection shutters, and completing site -built structures. r -' G' _kC" .'i!v-7:rr , .r_--•"r u4 '1, Sti i'1i_— ...T n .w+. r •",I" - AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD.(p. 96) r_, , Vi STEP 1. REPAIR a -:f7 _ •' 4', j• L, 4 ,_. -l rl 1+1A er,7 _ _t•• . r:F ,- - i -'i •,.,:.: 7 7.`!'' qi y•l i•'';, is -l•- M1. -:'i' L- ACC J • r.-• '' E K•"Li: 7 96 !`. Ai;STEPf2. INSTAL&GROUND_ .;MOISTURE RETARDER ( w' ,r. r ,i' ._ ,I. .?tii •.dh -•y' i" c b _ '1+: ` q _ t 1 l _ 1 :_•- s-.. r3 l 3 l).' c' Y-' - y-i •a .jr+'?'.F,r: y7S1f 4- ..1 i'. F '-;y` :"'.'i k 1 i.V.'J,STEP, 3 INSTALL' SKIRTING (p'97) :•i r ,+ ., ; : 1+»,, _ J : ., "- I } ;;,;•' •; l , i',• `' ;' J .- A, 'E: ',• r'..' - ;.4;t'''`' F ',. ' la, Ir 4 •'.. N 1, , f1 eSTEP 4 AS EMBLE.OPTIONALWlND PROTECTION SHUTTERS' ''97 y = r :;1 Jc :„ „ ,, ``r;•LLi-;27!r ';,'Ci'` ?i y7 i.' 't. 6';Z ' 4 r'fi- i, "'ii. 'ilrz[ h`- Ilz•l'ii-';- yrh„l-i'' T•..'-,i • Fy;r- _c.f .}•:t. ''L'ui: STEP. COMPLETE SITE=BUILT' STRUCTURES (p:r97),' '. r ?:,•,r: t t j;a-i i ,' , .•,,. t;' db i H..'rw.. I STEP 1. REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD Tears and openings in the bottom board can result from transportation or installation activities. Inspect for holes and gaps the entire bottom board, especially areas around service penetrations, crossover connections, pipe and duct hangers, foundation ele- Sealing bottom boards. A ments, and the perimeter of the floor. Using approved materials appropriate for the type continuous and sealed bot- of repair, repair the bottom board wherever torn or loosened as follows: tom board is critical for 1. Insulate. Replace any missing insulation prior to closure and repair of the bot- home performance, energy tom board, paying particular attention to insulation gaps that may have been efficiency, protection created at P-traps. against moisture problems, 2. Repair large openings. Repair large openings with a durable patch made of bot- prevention of pipe freezing, and against in - bottom board fabric or other compatible material and fastened with vinyl tom board tape held in place by fasteners installed with a divergent stapler. protection sects and rodents. Seal the edges around patches with foam or mastic. For large openings, in- Bottom board sealing stall a rigid backer board behind the bottom board to provide a fastening sub- methods. Tapes shall strate for the patch. never be used alone to re- 3. Repair small openings. Repair small gaps and tears with a combination of pair a bottom board. Diver - vinyl bottom board tape, patches, mastic, or foam sealant. gent staples or mastic must be used in tandem with STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER tape to prevent future tear off. DIf the space under the home is to be enclosed with skirting or other materials, a ground Fastening vinyl siding. Dogyg' Z Q moisture retarder of a minimum six mil thick polyethylene sheeting or equivalent must the home. Moisture retarders are not required in not install fasteners directly 2 Z be installed covering the ground under arid regions (less than 15 inches of rainfall annually) with dry soil conditions. If on- into vinyl siding. Allow for siding thermal expansiong O_ grade (surface) footings are used, install the ground moisture retarder prior to placing by pre -drilling minimum 112 F- the footings, or install it around the footings after all other work under the home is com- inch diameter fastener plete. holes or fastening skirting Install the ground moisture retarder as follows: to a ledger under the home Z 1. Apply sheeting. Unroll the ground moisture overlapping joints in the sheeting a see Best Practice tip). Z minimum of 12 inches and covering the entire area under the home except for O areas under recessed entries, decks, and porches. Q 2. Seal joints. Seal joints in the retarder with mastic. 3. Weigh down. To keep the retarder in place, weigh it down with stones, concrete Avoiding radon. a ccO blocks, or other heavy, durable materials. For enclosed perimeter wall crawlspace foundations in V 4. Repair tears. Repair any voids or tears in the retarder by patching with like ma- areas where radon is com- W terial, maintaining a minimum 12-inch overlap and sealing joints with mastic. monly found in the soil, Z continue the moisture re- tarder up the perimeter wall Y 07 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 4. do t, HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 STEP 3. INSTALL SKIRTING Skirting is any structural or non-structural perimeter crawlspace enclosure. Complete site -built structures (see STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE -BUILT STRUCTURES, p.98) that abut the home (such as porches, attached garages, and steps) prior to installing skirt- ing. TABLE 26. ANCHOR SYSTEM MATERIALS SPECIFICATIONS Skirting must be of weather -resistant materials or provided with protection against weather deterioration at least equivalent to that provided by a coat- ing of zinc on steel of not less than 0.30 oz per sq ft of surface coated. Skirting made from wood or wood products and used within six inches of the ground needs to be made of materials naturally resistant to decay andtermiteinfestationorpressuretreated. inch mdkiiiiuin opehing;tn-any;dtmensi nt eovenn-g thatis;designed to,prevent t tq freezing;,`the;,covennas for the:vent To design and install skirting, comply with the skirting manufacturer's instructions (if provided) and the following: 1. Configure skirting. Run the skirting along the perimeter of the home's heated, conditioned space. Do not enclose with skirting areas under recessed entries, porches, or decks (whether constructed as part of the home or added on site) unless skirting is of the fully vented type and installed so as to allow water to freely flow out from under the home. 2. Fasten skirting. Recess the skirting under the siding or trim and attach it to the home in a manner that prevents water from being trapped between the siding or trim and the skirting. For wood, aluminum, or fiberglass skirting, in- stall a skirt rail (lumber strip) under the floor inset at least 1-1/2 inches from the edge of the siding for attachment of the skirting. Allow for frost heave when installing skirting in areas subject to frost. 3. Provide ventilation. Unless the skirting has integral ventilation openings that meet the following ventilation requirements, install equally sized ventilation openings on at least two opposite sides of the foundation. Size ventilation area to equal at least one square foot or each 150 square feet of under -floor area (or for each 1,500 square feet if a ground moisture retarder is installed according to STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER, p. 96). Place vents as high above the ground as practical. 4. Install access. Provide an access opening not less than 18 inches wide and 24 inches high and located so that any utility connections located under the home are accessible. 5. Extend vents, drains, and inlets. Run appliance exhaust vents, combustion air inlets, and air conditioner condensation drains through the skirting to the outside and terminate each as instructed in the sections of this manual corre- sponding to each appliance. STEP 4. ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUT- TERS If desired, prepare temporary protective window covers for use during severe wind storms and hurricanes according to Figure 97, Table 27, and the procedure below. 1. Assemble extension framing using with two 16d common nails at each con- nection. 2. Assemble shutter panels as shown in Figure 97. 3. Store the shutters such that they are protected from the weather, are not in di- rect contact with the ground, and are easily accessible by the homeowner. 9:22 E 4-48 PG. 1) at least 12 inches, sealing the edges and between the seams with mastic. Attaching vinyl siding. To install skirting on vinyl - sided homes, screw a treated 2 x 4 on edge to the underside of the floor joists two inches back from the edge of the home. Screw skirting tight to the 2 x 4. Avoid backfilling against skirting. Do not backfill against non-structural skirt- ing. 97 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. J Q D Z Q Z O Q J J Q H rn Z_ Z O F- Q O a W O U W Z J Y rn d-j To attach shutters to the home: 1. Fasten extension framing to wall framing materials with 16d double -headed nails or #8 x 3" screws, toe nailed/screwed, per Table 27. 2. Fasten assembled panel(s) to extension framing with 12d nails, per Table 27. After use, remove shutters from the home, patch nail holes with caulk and store them as above. If oesl"d S.— OSS. Py.mad to studding WR1121 Nile at C O.C. 2.4 02 SPF Studding, NdWd Wtrn Ply—d. OSs Us"d is V a Lds In TNd— TABLE 27. SHUTTER CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE -BUILT STRUCTURES Install site -built structures such as steps, landings, garages, awnings, carports, breezeways, porches, decks, railings, sheds, and utility rooms according to manufac- turer's instructions (if any), in compliance with all local regulations including fire separa- tion and electrical requirements, and according to the following: Construct site -built structures to be structurally independent unless provided for in the design of the home (instructions will be provided by the manufac- turer). Do not damage the integrity of the home's structural or weatherproofing sys- tem. Seal any weatherproofing connections between the site -built structure and the home and flash any roof connections. Utilize only GFCI outlets for site -built structures. Install and test smoke alarms in any site -built structures according to local code. 4-48 Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 Figure 97. Wind protection shutter construction V&*#Z1Zj Designing site -built struc- tures. All site -built struc- tures must support their own dead, live, and wind loads and must not transmit any loads to the home's structure. All car- ports should be freestand- ing. 1 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 4 J,t A Prepare Home for Occupancy S#0 Follow these steps for final inspection and completion of the home. C nforms to Mecss 7-"fit l,i 1, if C.'',i_ i`-'^{. :: ;^„_•i lyl`;tC' ''tl " J.'! ,F -- 1:VERItYAL AT ONSTRUCTIINSPECTION ra0 : STEM r TERN IVE C ON.(A/C) INSPECT 71; s'! ru--'S .i' ,,: ION.P iY••rJ^t' ,'T. •, 'i4, f . i ,.4 :I' ^ ' 1 3 i• '+,•. t— ;. :.. . "- .'"uI-.,.. A f h fii c ry ( i'. •• ,,;% t''H1u i - 'v,,tt,' '` i,.-. y+ } STEP SPELT c ,' 2.;COMPLETE IN ION,CHECKL•IST P•,99)'.!•`i; .• •i''{F' i';;,. :'. ,•a _: ,j ,,'(1, ,;,:__ol; o,, ri, , I} I' 'lit}l 11 ` 1, t - F it '{ l_'.z, _t,1 .4l,.. A; a.rt, i. a) .'•.- "•J. 1'I.l•• I L r'Ft • •; f A';: c - * ` ;II , .. - it f Fr ,!', .ii, l??. '., t"- .R ,y.,, t•y, } :_; Q• 1,STE0-.3 'COMPLETE ENERGY STARCHECKLISTy(p: r •~• Fi; . J' •p p. ''A i _. .',I; t a. - '`1 h +.• '1,'- _%. -•+"s_i;'• •• • i! .j{t..C.., .i - 'r' n.: i " STEP, 4: C'LEAN'THE HOME: _(P: c4, ,' • a, ! r - "' .. s L. i, .-:Fnf''t•'`--",: a - ,.l;`;•l,.I:. i,f', STEP 1. VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) IN- SPECTION This is normally the responsibility of the retailer and the manufacturer, however, the in- stallation is not complete until the alternative construction inspection has been passed anddocumented. STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST After all previous steps have been accomplished, inspect the home to verify that it has been completely and properly installed using the checklist starting on p. 100. Correct any deficiencies found, if possible, or if not possible, inform the retailer or manufacturer immediately. STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST For ENERGY STAR qualified homes (check with the retailer or manufacturer), this step istobecompletedbythemanufacturer's designated representative. Ask the retailer or the manufacturer who this is. The manufacturer's representative must complete the Energy Star Site Installation Checklist, obtain signatures on the ENERGY STAR label, and return the completed ENERGY STAR Site Installation Checklist to the manufacturing plant. STEP 4. CLEAN THE HOME Remove and properly dispose of all installation -generated dust, debris, and packaging materialsfromthehomeandthesurroundingproperty. Ensure that the home is in move - in" condition. LL AM Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. V k, Cb I Complete Installation cnecKiist J Q Z Q Z O r= Q J J a Cn Z Z O F- Q O a o: O v w Z J Y Cn 100 Use this checklist to confirm that the listed aspects of the installation are complete and FOUNDATION Footings properly sized and constructed for the soil conditions Pier spacing per data plate and applicable table and roof load zone Piers properly constructed and vertical Perimeter blocking installed (if required) Piers at each side of large sidewall openings Center line piers installed at columns Shims in place and tight ANCHORS Approved anchors are used Anchors are installed at correct angles Anchor spacing and installation correct Longitudinal ties installed (if required) Anchor straps are tensioned UNDER THE HOME Moisture retarder installed The ground is properly graded to prevent water accumulation HVAC ducts are supported off the ground and connected tightly to collars at all ends Fireplace combustion air intake free and unrestricted No holes or tears in bottom board Skirting has been installed per manufacturer's instructions with proper vent- ing and provision for frost heave Dryer vent, range/cook top exhaust, water heater temperature and pressure overflow pipe and AC condensate drain installed to perimeter of crawl space EXTERIOR Shingled roofs are free of visible damage and serious defects and there are no missing or loose shingles Shingle close-up and ridge cap have been completed per applicable details All hold down straps on shingled roofs have been removed and staple holes have been properly sealed Penetrations at roof stacks, vents and chimneys have been properly sealed Siding and trim is free of gaps, voids, missing fasteners, damage, and seri- ous defects. All seams are sealed and hardboard edges are sealed Drip edge and fascia is properly installed and free of damage and serious de- fects Gutters and downspouts are installed properly such that water is diverted away from the home Trees and bushes have been trimmed to prevent brushing against the home in windy conditions or under snow loads The HUD label is exposed, intact and legible The exterior of the home and immediate surroundings is clean, clear of con- struction materials, dust, and debris ne Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) Mforms to ID MHC 1/15/09 Limits of the checklist. This checklist is not all-inclusive. Some homes have impor- tant features not listed here. Completing this checklist does not guaran- tee that all installation re- quirements have been met. 9:22 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. Ai "0" to INTERIOR Ceilings, walls, and floor coverings are free from damage and serious defects Carpeting is properly stretched and seamed All trim and molding is installed properly and free of damage and defects All cabinets, countertops, plumbing fixtures, appliances, furnishings, and window coverings are free of damage or serious defects All cabinet doors and drawers work properly All interior and exterior doors and windows open, close, and latch properly One window in each bedroom meets emergency egress requirements, has operating instruction labels on it, and operates properly All temporary shipping hardware has been removed Floors are level The data plate is intact and legible Smoke alarms have been tested The interior of the home is clean, clear of materials, dust, and debris WATER AND DRAIN SYSTEMS Crossover and service connection and splices have been properly made with correct materials Water and drain lines are insulated or otherwise protected from freezing Pipe supports are installed and properly spaced Proper slope has been maintained on all drain lines All necessary inspections and tests have been performed All sinks, basins, tubs, and toilets operate properly All hot and cold water lines are properly connected to fixtures, dispense wa- ter as labeled, and operate properly ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS The panel amperage matches the connection to the home The home has been properly grounded The main power supply has been properly connected and tested by a li- censed electrician All electrical crossovers have been connected All receptacles, switches, and light fixtures operate properly Ground fault circuit interrupters operate properly All exterior lights have been properly installed GAS/FUEL OIL SYSTEMS The gas system pressure test has been conducted Connections between units are properly made with access as required The main fuel line has been properly connected and tested by a qualifiedtechnician APPLIANCE OPERATING AND VENTING All appliances are working properly Appliance venting is in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions Fresh air intakes are properly installed Whole house, kitchen, and bath exhaust fan operation are correct Fireplace chimney stack extension and roof cap have been installed in ac- cordance with the manufacturer's instructions 22 AM e Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) PF#os 1';* Conforms to HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 rn X r Z m n O o O 1 O Z Z to D r r d O Z 3 D Z C D r 101 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 102 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. w , 1' (b w W 4 1Aw Index of Steps INTRODUCTION............................................................... IMPORTANTNOTICES............................................................................................................................. 3 SAFETY..................................................................................................................................................... 3 RESOURCES............................................................................................................................................ 4 FEDERALPREEMPTION.......................................................................................................................... 4 DEFINITIONS............................................................................................................................................ 4 ENGINEER'S STAMP................................................................................................................................ 6 SYMBOLS USED IN THE MANUAL......................................................................................................... 6 ABBREVIATIONS...................................................................................................................................... 6 ALTERNATIVE FOUNDATION SYSTEMS............................................................................................... 6 DISPLAY AND STORAGE OF THE HOME.............................................................................................. 6 GETTINGSTARTED................................................................................ STEP 1. LOCATE THE DATA PLATE ........................... ................. 8 STEP2. CONFIRM WIND ZONE............................................................................................................... 8 STEP 3. CONFIRM THERMAL ZONE....................................................................................................... 9 STEP 4. CONFIRM ROOF -LOAD ZONE................................................................................................... 10 STEP 5. CHECK LOCAL CODES AND SECURE PERMITS.................................................................... 12 PREPARETHE SITE..................................................................... STEP 1. PLAN SITE ACCESS ..........................................................""""""""••..•••••••13 STEP 2. DETERMINE HOME LOCATION AND LAYOUT........................................................................13 STEP 3. CLEAR AND GRADE THE SITE.................................................................................................14 STEP 4. DETERMINE SOIL CONDITION................................................................................................. 14 STEP 5. DETERMINE SOIL -BEARING CAPACITY AND FROST LINE...................................................15 STEP 6. DETERMINE GROUND ANCHOR HOLDING CAPACITY..........................................................16 INSTALLFOOTINGS........................................................................................ STEP 1. DESIGN POINT LOAD SUPPORTS...........................................................................................18 STEP 2. DESIGN FRAME SUPPORTS (Homes Without Perimeter Blocking) ...................................... 21 STEP 3. DESIGN FRAME AND PERIMETER SUPPORTS (Homes With Perimeter Blocking).............22 STEP 4. SELECT FOOTING MATERIALS................................................................................................ 23 STEP5. SIZE FOOTINGS......................................................................................................................... 23 STEP6. INSTALL FOOTINGS.................................................................................................................. 26 CONSTRUCT FOUNDATIONS..................................................................... 28 STE............ P 1. OBTAIN A FOUNDATION DESIGN............................................................................................28 STEP2. EXCAVATE................................................................................................................................. 28 STEP 3. CONSTRUCT THE FOOTING OR SLAB....................................................................................28 STEP 4. CONSTRUCT THE PERIMETER WALL.....................................................................................28 STEP 5. INSTALL INTERIOR SUPPORTS...............................................................................................29 STEP 6. WATERPROOF FOUNDATION WALL....................................................................................... 29 STEP7. BACKFILL AND GRADE............................................................................................................ 29 SETTHE HOME................................................................................. STEP 1. PREPARE FOR SET ................................ .......................30 STEP 2. POSITION HOME SECTION....................................................................................................... 30 STEP3. LIFT HOME.................................................................................................................................. 30 STEP4. CONSTRUCT PIERS................................................................................................................... 32 COMPLETE MULTI -SECTION SET..........................................................................36STEP1. INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE ANCHORS.....................................................................................36 E on (4-48 PG. 1) Conforms 0 HUD MHCSS 1/15/09 C r z m n O X 0 O D O z z ca D r r D O z D z C D r 103 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 05 rms to STEP 2. REMOVE PROTECTIVE SHIPPING MATERIALS......................................................................36 1/15/09 STEP3. COMPLETE HINGED ROOF 36 STEP 4. REPAIR OR INSTALL MARRIAGE LINE GASKET................................................................... 38 STEP 5. POSITION ADDITIONAL HOME SECTIONS.............................................................................. 39 STEP6. CONNECT FLOORS 39 STEP7. CONNECT ROOF 41 STEP8. CONNECT WALLS 43 STEP9. ATTACH TAG UNITS 45 STEP10. REMOVE TEMPORARY ITEMS................................................................................................46 STEP 11. FASTEN HOME TO FOUNDATION.......................................................................................... 46 STEP12. BACKFILL AND GRADE.......................................................................................................... 46 STEP13. BUILD STAIRS.......................................................................................................................... 46 COMPLETE ROOF AND EXTERIOR WALLS ............................ STEP1. COMPLETE ROOF 47 STEP2. COMPLETE TAG UNIT ROOF 49 STEP3. COMPLETE SIDE WALLS..........................................................................................................51 CONNECTCROSSOVERS.......................................................................................52 STEP1. CONNECT DUCTS 52 STEP 2. CONNECT ELECTRICAL CROSSOVERS................................................................................. 56 STEP 3. INSTALL ELECTRICAL BONDING............................................................................................ 58 STEP4. CONNECT WATER LINES i 59 STEP 5. CONNECT DRAIN, WASTE, AND VENT LINES........................................................................60 I STEP6. CONNECT GAS LINES 61 STEP 7. CONNECT TELEPHONE AND CABLE TV WIRING.................................................................. 62 COMPLETETHE INTERIOR....................................................................................63 63 STEP1. ALIGN MARRIAGE WALLS........................................................................................................ STEP2. FINISH GYPSUM BOARD 63 STEP 3. COMPLETE WALL AND CEILING FINISHES STEP 4. COMPLETE CARPET ..............•...........•.........-.................................... 64 5. COMPLETE TRIMSTEP ITEMSSTEP6. INSTALL SHIP LOOSE ................................................................................................... 64 Q M INSTALL STABILIZING SYSTEM z 65 65 Q STEP 1. DETERMINE ANCHOR LOCATIONS....................................................................... STEP 2. DETERMINE TIE -DOWN CONFIGURATION.............................................................................. 71 z OSTEP 3. SELECT ANCHORS.................................................................................................................... 71 72 QSTEP 4. INSTALL ANCHORS................................................................................................................... 73 STEP 5. INSTALL STRAPS AND ADJUST STRAPSSTEP6. TIGHTEN .............................................................................................. 76 rn z CONNECT UTILITIES z STEP 1. CONNECT ELECTRICAL SERVICE........................................................................................... 77 O 80STEP2. CONNECT WATER SERVICE.................................................................................................... STEP3. CONNECT GAS SERVICE.......................................................................................................... 83 OSTEP 4. CONNECT OIL SERVICE............................................................................................................ 84 a 0 PREPARE APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT INSTALL AIR CONDITIONER OR HEAT PUMP . .......................•.................................• 86 86 w 87zPREPAREHEATINGSYSTEM................................................................................................................. J INSTALL REMOTE HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT..................................................................87 Y SYSTEM ....................................................... 88 PREPARE VENTILATION Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 1/9/2009 9: 104 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 1) ' .r is to 1/15/09 PREPARE FUEL -BURNING WATER HEATER........................................................................................88 PREPARECLOTHES DRYER.................................................................................................................. 89 PREPARESMOKE ALARMS................................................................................................................... 90 PREPAREFIREPLACES.......................................................................................................................... 90 PREPARE KITCHEN AND BATH APPLIANCES / FIXTURES................................................................. 92 INSTALLEXTERIOR LIGHTING............................................................................................................... 93 INSTALL CEILING FANS AND LIGHTING...............................................................................................93 TESTELECTRICAL SYSTEM................................................................................................................... 95 COMPLETE EXTERIOR WORK..................................................................... STEP 1. REPAIR AND SEAL BOTTOM BOARD..................................................................................... 96 STEP 2. INSTALL GROUND MOISTURE RETARDER............................................................................96 STEP3. INSTALL SKIRTING.................................................................................................................... 97 STEP 4. ASSEMBLE OPTIONAL WIND PROTECTION SHUTTERS...................................................... 97 STEP 5. COMPLETE SITE -BUILT STRUCTURES...................................................................................98 PREPARE HOME FOR OCCUPANCY.....................................................................99STEP1. VERIFY ALTERNATIVE CONSTRUCTION (A/C) INSPECTION ................................................ 99 STEP 2. COMPLETE INSPECTION CHECKLIST.....................................................................................99 STEP 3. COMPLETE ENERGY STAR CHECKLIST................................................................................. 99 STEP4. CLEAN THE HOME..................................................................................................................... 99 COMPLETE INSTALLATION CHECKLIST..............................................................100 Skyline Corporation (4-48 PG. 1) 105 PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09. 4, i p PFS certifies this document is current as of 12-16-09.